217
Harmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Harmonic MCTMass Configuration Tool

Software GuideVERSION 11.2.0.X

NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G

Rev B

Page 2: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved.

Disclaimer

Harmonic reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part ofthis publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into suchcontract or warranty. The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature, and does not constitute a binding offer forsale of the product described herein. Harmonic assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the use of the products describedherein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by Harmonic. The use and purchase of this product do not convey a license underany patent rights, copyrights, trademark rights, or any intellectual property rights of Harmonic. Nothing hereunder constitutes arepresentation or warranty that using any products in the manner described herein will not infringe any patents of third parties.

Trademark Acknowledgments

Harmonic and all Harmonic product names are trademarks of Harmonic Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respectiveowners.

Page 3: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved.

Documentation ConventionsThis manual uses some special symbols and fonts to call your attention to important information. The following symbols appear throughout this manual:

DANGER: The Danger symbol calls your attention to information that, if ignored, can cause physical harm to you.

CAUTION: The Caution symbol calls your attention to information that, if ignored, can adversely affect the performance of your Harmonic product, or that can make a procedure needlessly difficult.

LASER DANGER: The Laser symbol and the Danger alert call your attention to information about the lasers in this product that, if ignored, can cause physical harm to you.

NOTE: The Note symbol calls your attention to additional information that you will benefit from heeding. It may be used to call attention to an especially important piece of information you need, or it may provide additional information that applies in only some carefully delineated circumstances.

TIP: The Tip symbol calls your attention to parenthetical information that is not necessary for performing a given procedure, but which, if followed, might make the procedure or its subsequent steps easier, smoother, or more efficient.

In addition to these symbols, this manual uses the following text conventions:

Data Entry: indicates text you enter at the keyboard.

User Interface: indicates a button to click, a menu item to select, or a key or key sequence to press.

Screen Output: shows console output or other text that is displayed to you on a computer screen.

Bold: indicates the definition of a new term.

Italics: used for emphasis, cross-references, and hyperlinked cross-references in online documents.

Page 4: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Table of Contents

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 1 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61.2 MCT Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

1.2.1 System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61.2.2 Installing MCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71.2.3 Integrating MCT in a Firewalled Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

1.3 Starting MCT and Logging In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81.3.1 Changing MCT Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91.3.2 Reverting to the Default Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

1.4 Migrating to a Higher MCT Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface2.1 Getting to Know the MCT UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

2.1.1 MCT Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132.1.2 MCT Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132.1.3 Device Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142.1.4 Quick Access Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152.1.5 MCT Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162.1.6 MCT Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162.1.7 MCT Ribbon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172.1.8 MCT Navigation Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182.1.9 Device Information Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192.1.10 Details Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.2 Getting to Know the Clipboard Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212.2.1 Selecting Multiple Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212.2.2 Selecting Multiple Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222.2.3 Copying and Pasting Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Chapter 3 MCT Basics3.1 Managing MCT Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

3.1.1 MCT Database Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243.1.2 Creating a New Database File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243.1.3 Backing Up MCT Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253.1.4 Working with Previous MCT Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

3.2 Managing Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263.2.1 Tree view of Sites and NSGs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263.2.2 Adding, Renaming and Deleting a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263.2.3 Viewing a Site and devices - Using Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

3.3 Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293.3.1 Understanding the Editor Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293.3.2 Adding a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303.3.3 Adding a Range of NSGs with Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303.3.4 Adding a Single Device with Cloned Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Page 5: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Table of Contents

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 2 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3.3.5 Adding a Range of NSGs with Cloned Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323.3.6 Deleting an NSG Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323.3.7 Setting Device Eth1 IP Address and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

3.4 Supporting Various NSG Versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343.4.1 Customizing the List of Supported Versions of NSG Firmware . . . . 34

3.5 Finding the Parameters You Want. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353.5.1 Find Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

3.6 Getting to Know the MCT Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373.6.1 Launching NSG Web Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373.6.2 Resetting NSGs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373.6.3 Setting the Internal NSG Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373.6.4 Changing NSG Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383.6.5 Converting NSG 9000 to NSG 9000-6G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383.6.6 Converting NSG 9000-6G to NSG 9000-40G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403.6.7 Action Status Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

3.7 Downloading NSG Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443.7.1 Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG 9000-3G 453.7.2 Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG 9000-6G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463.7.3 Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG 9000-40G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

3.8 MCT and NSGs Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533.8.1 Comparing Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533.8.2 Synchronizing Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543.8.3 Sending Configuration to NSGs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

3.9 Exporting Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553.9.1 Exporting to NMX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563.9.2 Exporting to SDV Session Manager of BigBand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573.9.3 Exporting to SDV Session Manager of Cisco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573.9.4 Exporting Device Uptime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

3.10 RF Module Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593.11 Distributing Alarms Configuration to Multiple NSGs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603.12 Creating Custom QAM Mapping File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

3.12.1 Importing Customized QAM Mapping Mode File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633.12.2 Exporting Customized QAM Mapping Mode File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

3.13 Retrieving Licensing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633.13.1 Understanding the Licensing Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

3.14 Authentication Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below)4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704.2 Setting NSG Platform Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704.3 Configuring Input Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

4.3.1 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 8108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714.3.2 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754.3.3 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000 1.5 & Below . . . . . . . . . . 77

4.4 Configuring Operation Mode Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784.4.1 PID Remapping Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854.4.2 UDP Port Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Page 6: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Table of Contents

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 3 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4.5 Configuring Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864.5.1 Configuring the TS Out in NSG 8108 and 9116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874.5.2 Configuring TS Out in NSG 9000 1.5 & Below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914.5.3 Multicast (NSG 8108 and 9116) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934.5.4 Routing a Socket (Sessions) - NSG 9000 1.5 & Below . . . . . . . . . . 94

4.6 Defining NGOD Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954.7 Configuring Network Routing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964.8 Configuring SNMP Managers and Community. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

4.8.1 Configuring SNMP Parameters for NSG 8108 and 9116 . . . . . . . . 974.8.2 Configuring SNMP - NSG 9000 1.5 & Below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

4.9 Generating Access Control List (ACL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984.10 Conditional Access System (CAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

4.10.1 Configuring DVB CAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004.10.2 Privacy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034.10.3 Configuring PM Global Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044.10.4 Configuring Privacy Mode Parameters per NSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105.2 Setting NSG Platform Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105.3 Configuring Management Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

5.3.1 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up . . . . . . . . . . 1125.3.2 RF Module Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

5.4 Configuring Redundancy Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165.5 Configuring VOD Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165.6 Configuring SDV Redundancy Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

5.6.1 Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185.7 Configuring NSG 9000 and ISA SRM Communication . . . . . . . . . 1195.8 Setting Device Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

5.8.1 Configuring TS Out in NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205.9 Configuring Network Routing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235.10 Broadcast Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

5.10.1 Defining a Passthrough Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245.10.2 Defining Service Remux Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255.10.3 Defining PID Remux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

5.11 Configuring M-CMTS Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265.12 Configuring NGOD Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up . . . . . . . 1285.13 Configuring CAS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295.14 Configuring SNMP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305.15 Generating Access Control List (ACL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336.2 Setting NSG Platform Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336.3 Configuring Management Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356.4 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-6G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

6.4.1 Configuring GbE Port Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Page 7: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Table of Contents

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 4 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

6.4.2 Input Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1396.5 Configuring/Viewing RF Module Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

6.5.1 QAM-RF Module Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1396.6 RF Module Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

6.6.1 RF Module Redundancy Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1416.6.2 Enabling the RF Module Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1416.6.3 Reverting Redundancy Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

6.7 Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446.7.1 EdgeCluster Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446.7.2 Enabling EdgeCluster Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446.7.3 Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466.7.4 Synchronizing Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476.7.5 Working with Devices in EdgeCluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1486.7.6 EdgeCluster Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

6.8 Configuring VOD Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1506.9 Configuring SDV Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1516.10 Configuring ISA-Device Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

6.10.1 Defining Virtual ISA Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1546.11 Setting Device Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1556.12 Configuring TS Out Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1566.13 Configuring Network Routing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606.14 Configuring Broadcast Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

6.14.1 Defining Passthrough Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606.14.2 Defining Service Remux Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616.14.3 Defining PID Remux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626.14.4 PID Range Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

6.15 Configuring M-CMTS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1676.16 Configuring NGOD Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1696.17 Configuring CAS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

6.17.1 Selecting Encryption Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1706.17.2 Configuring PM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1706.17.3 Configuring DVB CAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

6.18 Configuring SNMP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1746.19 Device Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1777.2 Setting NSG Platform Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1777.3 Configuring Management Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1797.4 Configuring Ethernet Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1807.5 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-40G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

7.5.1 Configuring GbE Port Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1807.6 Configuring/Viewing RF Module Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1837.7 Configuring/Viewing RF Ports Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1857.8 Configuring TS Out Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1877.9 Configuring the VOD Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1907.10 Configuring SDV Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Page 8: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Table of Contents

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 5 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

7.11 Configuring ISA-Device Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1927.12 Defining Virtual Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

7.12.1 Creating Virtual Management IPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1947.12.2 Creating GbE Virtual IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1957.12.3 Creating Virtual Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

7.13 Setting Device Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1977.14 Configuring Network Routing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1987.15 Configuring Broadcast Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

7.15.1 Defining Service Remux Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1997.15.2 Defining PID Remux Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

7.16 Configuring M-CMTS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2017.17 Configuring NGOD Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2017.18 Configuring CAS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

7.18.1 Configuring PM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2037.19 Configuring SNMP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Appendix A Standard ES Types and DescriptorsA.1 Standard Elementary Stream (ES) Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206A.2 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (MPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206A.3 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (DVB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Appendix B EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps

Page 9: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 6 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 1Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction

1.1 OverviewThe Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) provides a method to rapidly configure a large number of Network Services Gateways (NSGs) through single application. With the MCT you can plan and record NSG configuration data offline, even before the NSGs are installed. Configuration details for each NSG are stored in an MCT database and downloaded to the NSGs over Ethernet.

Use MCT for the following purposes:

To make a template of the standard NSG configuration

To download the set configuration to all the NSGs in your network

To download NSG firmware to NSGs

To migrate between MCT versions, see 1.4 Migrating to a Higher MCT Version on page 10.

1.2 MCT InstallationThe following items are shipped on the MCT CD:

MCT setup files

A PDF file of this user’s guide and additional documentation

1.2.1 System Requirements

Table 1-1: Hardware and Software Requirements

Component Component Details Minimum Requirements

Processor Type Intel Core 2 duo or equivalent

Frequency 2.4GHz

Processor Bus Speed 533MHz

RAM RAM 4GBytes

Drives Hard Drive 40GBytes

CD-ROM X52, Internal

Video Adapter Interface PCI or AGP 2X

Resolution 1280 x 768

Video Monitor Size 20" or larger

Resolution 1024 x 768, 75Hz

Ports Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2 ports, USB 1.0 or 2.0

Page 10: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 1 Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction MCT Installation

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 7 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

NOTE: When using MCT as ERS proxy in a Privacy Mode enabled system, MCT should have connectivity to the NSG devices as well as the ERS (via the internet)

NOTE: Harmonic strongly recommends not to install any additional software application(s) with the exception of NMX, on the MCT PC. Although no inter-operability issues are known, Harmonic can not guarantee correct operation of the MCT on a PC with other applications.

1.2.2 Installing MCT 1. Close all running applications on the computer.

2. Insert the MCT software CD into the CD drive.

An installation menu opens listing the items you can install.

3. From the installation menu, select MCT Setup.

4. Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation and reboot the computer when the installation completes.

By default, the application is installed in the following location:

MCT - C:\Program Files\Harmonic\MCT\MCT 10.x. (x stands for a real number, per software version)

The folder Harmonic\MCT is added to the Start menu of your computer

The following shortcut is added to the desktop.

NOTE: MCT 9.x.x and up unifies MCT and MCT PM into a single software package.

Network Adapter One port, 10/100 Base-T

Operating System The following options are supported: Windows 2003 Server 32-bit (English) Windows XP SP3 (English) Windows 2000 Workstation or Server (English)

Microsoft .NET Framework

Microsoft .NET Framework version 2.0

Table 1-1: Hardware and Software Requirements

Component Component Details Minimum Requirements

Page 11: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 1 Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction Starting MCT and Logging In

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 8 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

1.2.3 Integrating MCT in a Firewalled NetworkTo allow MCT to communicate with other devices in a firewalled network, open the ports listed in the following table. Make sure to adjust your firewall to work with the TCP ports:

1.3 Starting MCT and Logging InTo prevent unauthorized access to sensitive configuration data, MCT requires users to login using a specific user name and password.

The default user name and password are predefined as configure and are case sensitive. The user name is fixed and may not be changed.

To Start MCT and to Login

1. In your desktop, double click the MCT icon,

Or

Select Start > Programs > Harmonic > MCT> MCT 10.x.x

The following dialog appears:

2. In Password, enter configure, the default password.

3. Click Ok.

MCT opens and you can start configuring the NSGs. To configure, create or open a database. For details see, 3.1.2.1 Opening a Database on page 27.

Table 1-2: Required Open Ports

Port Comment Explanation

Port 21 Standard FTP port

Allows MCT to connect to the FTP server for firmware upgrade of NSG 9000, NSG 9116 and NSG 8108 devices

Port 80 Standard HTTP port

Allows MCT to communicate with NSG devices and License Manager.

Port 23 Standard Telnet port

Allows MCT to communicate with NSG devices using the Telnet protocol.

Port 443 Standard HTTPs port

For NSG 9000-6G and NSG 9000-40G devices: allows communication with HTTPs server Allows communication with Motorola ERS.

Page 12: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 1 Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction Starting MCT and Logging In

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 9 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

1.3.1 Changing MCT Password

NOTE: This feature is unsupported for NSG 9000-40G.

1. Click MCT button.

2. The following screen appears:

1. Click MCT Options.

2. Select the General tab.

3. Click Change MCT Configure Password.

MCT Options

Page 13: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 1 Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction Migrating to a Higher MCT Version

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 10 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

The following dialog opens:

4. Enter the data for the current password, the new requested password and re-enter the new password for verification.

5. Click Change.

1.3.2 Reverting to the Default PasswordIf for any reason you need to revert back to the default password, execute the following steps:

1. Start the MCT application

In the MCT Login dialog, click Lost Password.:

A message box window opens with a unique Request Code.

2. Contact Harmonic Customer Support and submit the Request code.

You will receive a temporary password from Harmonic Customer Support.

NOTE: The password provided is valid for that day and expires at midnight.

3. Enter the temporary password given in the Reset Code box. You are asked if you really want to set the password to it’s default.

4. Select Yes. A text box appears stating that a Password has been set to it’s default setting.

5. Run MCT using its default password.

1.4 Migrating to a Higher MCT Version You can add NSGs organized in older databases to databases of higher MCT versions by importing the management IP addresses of the NSGs into your current MCT database. If the IP addresses are organized in sites, you may choose whether to import sites hierarchy as well, or only NSG IP addresses. Once the IP address is added, you need to configure the imported devices.

To import NSGs from previous databases

Click to get a temporary password

Page 14: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 1 Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction Migrating to a Higher MCT Version

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 11 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

1. To import NSGs into a specific site, select that site. Otherwise, select the root node of the tree view.

2. Click MCT button.

3. Select Import > Import NSG IPs.

The Open MCT File dialog appears.

4. Browse to the required MCT database and click Open.

If the IP addresses are organized in sites, you are asked whether to import the site tree as well.

Click Yes to import the IP addresses with the site tree.

Click No, to import the IP addresses without the site tree.

The IP addresses of the NSGs included in the imported database appear under the specified site (if selected in step 1), or under a temporary site called Imported NSGs.

5. To arrange the imported NSGs, you can drag and drop in the required site.

6. Configure the newly added NSGs.

Page 15: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 12 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 2MCT User Interface

2.1 Getting to Know the MCT UI The MCT User Interface is comprised of the following:

MCT button - see 2.1.1 MCT Button on page 13

Quick Access Tool Bar - see 2.1.4 Quick Access Tool Bar on page 15

Title Bar - see 2.1.5 MCT Title Bar on page 16

MCT Tabs bar - see 2.1.6 MCT Tabs on page 16

Navigation pane - see 2.1.8 MCT Navigation Pane on page 18

Device Information - see 2.1.9 Device Information Section on page 19

Details - see 2.1.10 Details Section on page 19

MCT button Title barQuick Access toolbar MCT tabs MCT ribbon

Device Information

DetailsDevice filters Tree view of database

Find Tab or Column

Page 16: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 13 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

2.1.1 MCT ButtonClick the MCT button to open, save, import, export and much more. The following table lists the options the MCT button offers:

2.1.2 MCT OptionsTo access MCT Options, do the following:

1. Click MCT Button.

The following dialog appears:

2. Click MCT Options.

Table 2-1: MCT Button

Menu Explanation

New allows to open a new database

Open allows to open an existing database

Import allows to import the management IPs of NSGs arranged in another database

Save allows to save the database

Save As allows to save a copy of the database

Export allows to export to the following: NMX, see SBSS template file USRM template file Device uptime

MCT Options allows to access general MCT properties, MCT defaults, supported versions and logs.

Exit allows to quit the MCT program

Click MCT Options

Page 17: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 14 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

The following dialog appears:

3. In the Navigation pane, select the required option. The following table lists the available option and its features:

2.1.3 Device TimeoutMCT allows you to set the time for device timeout. If MCT tries to connect with a device and the indicated device timeout period of time has elapsed, MCT sends an error message.

By default, the timeout is 200000 msec which is an optimized time for MCT device communication.

CAUTION: Do not change device timeout, unless your network is very slow and communication between MCT and the devices is affected.

To define device timeout1. Click MCT Button.

2. Click MCT Options.

Table 2-2:

Option Explanation

General Allows to set the following: Tree view, see 3.2.1 Tree view of Sites and NSGs on page 26 EdgeCluster ribbon group, see 6.7.2 Enabling EdgeCluster

Configuration on page 144 MCT configure password, see 1.3.1 Changing MCT Password

on page 9. Device timeout, see 2.1.3 Device Timeout on page 14.

Versions Allows to select the required version. See 3.4.1 Customizing the List of Supported Versions of NSG Firmware on page 34.

Custom UDP Mapping Allows to set custom UDP mapping files. See 3.12 Creating Custom QAM Mapping File on page 60.

Page 18: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 15 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

The following dialog appears:

3. Focus on General Properties.4. In NSG Communication Timeout (msec.), enter the required value in milli seconds.

2.1.4 Quick Access Tool Bar

The Quick Access Toolbar allows to open a new database and to save a database:

Table 2-3: Quick Access Toolbar

Buttons Explanation

Allows to open a new database.

Allows to save a database.

Allows to access the online help.

Allows to customize the location of the quick access bar and ribbon.

NSG communication timeout

Quick Access bar

New Save Help Customize

Page 19: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 16 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

2.1.5 MCT Title Bar

The MCT Title bar includes the following information:

Currently installed MCT version

Logged in user

Full path of the database

2.1.6 MCT Tabs MCT is furnished with two tabs:

Home - includes main MCT commands

Privacy Mode - includes commands related to Motorola Privacy Mode (PM) real-time encryption

Licensing - It includes commands to allow locating licensing records spread across different NSGs at different sites. This tab is available in NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG9000-6G filters only.

Authentication - allows to enter username and password for RADIUS server (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service). This tab is available in NSG9000-6G filter only.

MCT version Current user Full path of the current database

Page 20: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 17 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

2.1.7 MCT RibbonThe MCT Ribbon helps to quickly find the commands that you need. Commands are organized in logical groups, which are collected together under tabs. Currently MCT includes the following tabs:

2.1.7.1 Minimizing the Ribbon

1. Click Customize Quick Access Toolbar.2. In the menu that opens, click Minimize the Ribbon.

The Ribbon disappears except for the tabs.

3. To use the Ribbon while it is minimized, click the tab you want to use.

Table 2-4: MCT Tabs and Commands

Tab Command Group Explanation

Home Clipboard Allows to cut, copy and paste cells. See page 21.

Editor Allows to add site/device, delete site/device, add a range of devices, clone and clone a range. See page 29.

Actions Allows to launch device GUI, download firmware, reset device, set device clock and change a password. See page 37.

Firmware Installation

Allows to download firmware. See page page 44.

Synchronization Allows to get from device, send to device and compare with device. See page 53.

Distribute Allows to send the alarms configuration of a specific device to other devices. See page 60.

RF Module Redundancy

Allows to enable and configure QAM-RF module redundancy. See 6.6 RF Module Redundancy on page 141.

EdgeCluster Allows to work in edgeCluster mode. See 6.7 Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters on page 144.

Privacy Mode ECM Allows to update and purge ECMs. See page 104.

Options Allows to define PM parameters. See page 105.

ERS Communication

Allows to define ERS and NSG communication parameters. See page 106.

VODS Allows to define VODS parameters. See page 106.

Licensing Licensing Allows to query Harmonic’s database for licensing information.

Authentication RADIUS Credentials

Allows to enter username and password for RADIUS authentication. See page 68.

Page 21: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 18 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

2.1.8 MCT Navigation PaneThe Navigation pane includes the following sections:

A tree view section - shows in a tree view, the currently open MCT database.

Filters section - includes the following buttons to view a site via one of the following filters:

NSG 9000-40G - shows NSG 9000-40G devices only

NSG 9000-6G - shows NSG 9000-6G devices only

NSG 9000 - shows NSG 9000 devices only

NSG 8108 - shows NSG 8108 devices only

NSG 9116 - shows NSG 9116 devices only

For further details, see 3.2 Managing Sites on page 26.

2.1.8.1 Removing the Navigation Pane

To show/hide navigation pane:1. In the navigation pane click Show/Hide button.

The navigation pane is minimized to the side as the following picture shows:

2. To show the navigation pane, hover your mouse over the minimized navigation pane and once the Show icon appears, click it to show the navigation pane.

To enlarge the Tree View section

1. Hover your mouse pointer over this icon .

2. Once the mouse pointer changes into a double sided arrow, drag it down to enlarge the tree view section or up to down size it.

Minimized navigation pane

Hover the mouse pointer over this icon

Page 22: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 19 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

2.1.9 Device Information Section

This section displays the devices of the selected site. When selected, it enables options in the Ribbon that allow you to configure the devices.

To select the Device Information section Click the Title bar of the Device Information section. The color of the title bar changes to

orange.

Use the Device Information section to select a device and to view/define the device information. See 3.3.7 Setting Device Eth1 IP Address and Information on page 33.

2.1.10 Details SectionThe Details section includes the tabs relevant to the NSG according to the selected Baseline firmware version.

To select the Details section Click the Title bar of the Details section. The color of the title bar changes to orange.

2.1.10.1 Using the Details Section

When working with the Details section, the buttons Back, Forward and Sort in the Editor group are enabled.

The following table lists the buttons and explains their functionality:

Table 2-5: Editor Section - Buttons Related to Details Section

Button Explanation

Back Returns to the last tab, previous row and column.You can go back up to 10 previous tabs.

Click the title bar to select it

Click the title bar to select it

Page 23: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 20 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

In the Details sections there are linked parameters. These parameters link you to other tabs which provide information on the parameter. For example, in the Details section you are working with the RF tab. The Slot No. parameter is a linked parameter.

Once you click on the required linked slot, MCT displays the RF Module tab with the required slot record selected.

You can view information on the selected slot. To return to the RF tab, click Back in Editor group.

Forward Once you click Back, Forward in enabled. It moves you forward to the previous tab prior to clicking Back.

Find Allows to search the Details section. See page 35.

Sort Arranges the virtual devices according to the virtual device index.

Table 2-5: Editor Section - Buttons Related to Details Section

Button Explanation

RF Ports tab is selected Slot No. is a linked parameter.

RF Module tab is selected The record of Slot No. 2 is selected to display related slot information

Page 24: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the Clipboard Tools

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 21 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

2.2 Getting to Know the Clipboard ToolsThe Editing tools are organized in the Clipboard group.

To ease the NSG configuration using MCT, MCT is designed as an Excel sheet. As in Excel, pay attention to the following:

Select All button - click this button to select all the grid

Column Heading - indicates whether an attribute in the row is selected or whether the whole row is selected:

For additional icons that may appear in the Row heading, see 3.6.7.2 Reading Action Status Icons on page 43.

2.2.1 Selecting Multiple RowsYou can apply an MCT operation to multiple rows. For example, you can send configuration details to multiple NSGs in a single operation by first selecting the rows you want to send.

To select multiple rows1. In Device Information/Details, place the mouse pointer on the required row heading and

drag it along the required row headings until the last required row and release the mouse.

To select all rows1. Do either of the following:

Click Ctrl+A.

Select All button

Column Heading - attribute is selected

Column Heading - the whole row is selected

Page 25: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the Clipboard Tools

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 22 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Click Select All button

2.2.2 Selecting Multiple CellsTo select a range of cells, do either of the following:

Using mouse - click the first cell in the range, and then drag the mouse pointer to the last cell.

Using keyboard - click the first cell in the range, and then hold down <SHIFT> while pressing the arrow keys to extend the selection.

2.2.3 Copying and Pasting CellsIn any page, you can select cells across columns and rows, copy them, and paste them into other rows across the same columns. For example, you can select a group of cells spanning, say, five columns and three rows, and paste the selected data into another set of three rows, or a multiple of 3, across the same five columns.

To select cells1. Click on a cell.

A frame surrounds the cell.

2. Do either of the following:

Use Shift+click or Shift+Ctrl+click to select additional cells,

Or

Drag the mouse across rows and columns.

To copy and paste1. Highlight the cells you want to copy.

2. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click Copy or press Ctrl-C.

3. Select the section into which to paste the copied data.

The number of rows you select determines the extent of the operation. For example, if you copy three rows and then select six rows, the copied data is duplicated over the six rows; if you copy one cell and then select the column by clicking its heading, MCT copies the data to all the cells in that column.

4. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click Paste or press Ctrl-V.

2.2.3.1 Editing Cells

1. Double click the cell to be edited.

2. Edit the cell.

3. To apply changes, click <Enter>.

4. To cancel changes, click <ESC>.

Select All button

Page 26: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the Clipboard Tools

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 23 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

2.2.3.2 Copying to/from Excel

You can select cells or rows and copy them to/from Excel. However, when copying from Excel to any page of MCT, invalid values are rejected and are not updated in MCT.

Page 27: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 24 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 3MCT Basics

3.1 Managing MCT Database

3.1.1 MCT Database FilesConfiguration records are stored in an MCT database. You can maintain multiple databases to store different sets of configuration records for separate groups of NSGs, sites or networks. The database may contain records of various types of NSGs all of which are part of a site or network.

All database files have the *.mct extension and by default are stored in the default installation location in the DB folder; C:\Program Files\Harmonic\MCT\MCT 9.0\DB.

3.1.2 Creating a New Database FileYou can create a new database or create a new database that is based on an existing database.

To create a new database Do either of the following:

In the Quick Access Bar, click New File.

Or,

Click MCT button and select New.

The MCT screen is updated to present a new database:

Page 28: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing MCT Database

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 25 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

To create a database file based on another database file1. Open an existing database.

2. Click MCT button.

3. Click Save As.

4. In Save MCT File dialog, do the following:

select the required location for saving the new database

enter the required name for the new database.

5. Click Save.

The new file is now the current one. Now you can change template and the configuration records.

After creating or opening a database file, the NSG type and the database filename appear on the MCT window's title bar, along with the MCT's version number.

3.1.2.1 Opening a Database

To open a database1. Click MCT button.

2. Do either of the following:

In Recent Documents, select the required database.

Or,

3. Click Open.

1. Navigate to the required location and select the database.

2. Click Open.

3.1.3 Backing Up MCT DatabasesYou should regularly back up the MCT database files to protect against hard disk failure or corruption.

The file carries the name you assigned to it followed by the .mct extension.

To back up an MCT database:1. On the MCT computer, navigate to the directory your MCT database files are stored. The

default directory is: C:\Program Files\Harmonic\MCT\MCT xx.xx\Data\DB.

2. Copy the database files (.mct) to removable media.

3.1.4 Working with Previous MCT DatabasesFor detailed instructions, see 1.4 Migrating to a Higher MCT Version on page 10.

MCT version, current logged in user, database name and path

Page 29: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing Sites

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 26 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3.2 Managing Sites The Navigation pane allows you to manage and browse through the databases. The Navigation pane is divided into the following two sections:

Database Tree view - allows to arrange the database by creating sites and managing the NSG devices in each site

Filters - allows to view the database via the NSG type filter. To view all NSG types, see 3.2.3 Viewing a Site and devices - Using Filters on page 27.

3.2.1 Tree view of Sites and NSGsThe tree view includes three node types. The following table lists the various nodes, their graphical sign and explains the tree view hierarchy:

3.2.2 Adding, Renaming and Deleting a Site To add a new site

1. Select the MCT site.

2. On the Home tab, in Editor group, click Add.

A new site is added to the tree.

3. Enter a required name and press <Enter>.

Table 3-1:

Graphical Sign Node Type Explanation

MCT Select to add a site

Site Select to add a device

NSG Select to add another device to the site

Tree view section

Filters

Page 30: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing Sites

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 27 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

To rename a site1. Select the required site.

2. Click the site.

The site name becomes editable.

3. Type the required name.

To delete a site1. In the tree view, select the required site.

2. On the Home tab, in Editor group, click Delete.

3.2.3 Viewing a Site and devices - Using FiltersThe filters located at the bottom of the Navigation pane, define which NSG types appear in the database. By default, the tree view shows all sites included in the database with NSG 9000 devices, as NSG 9000 is the default filter.

Once you select a filter, the Navigation pane is updated according to the selected device and only these devices are enabled in the Navigation pane and their parameters can be configured.

You can also view all devices in a site regardless of the selected filter as explained in 3.2.3.1 Viewing Sites with All Device Types on page 28. If you selected to view all device types in tree view, device types other than the selected filter appear in the tree view as disabled devices.

To view a site with a device filter1. In the Navigation pane, select a site.

2. In the Navigation pane, click the required filter.

The tabs are updated accordingly and the relevant devices are enabled:

Selected filter

Devices included by filter Devices of another

type

Page 31: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing Sites

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 28 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

To customize the filters1. Click the Filter Customizing button.

2. Select one of the following options:

Show More Buttons - click to add more filters

Show Fewer Buttons - click to remove filters

Add Remove Buttons - click to select the filter you wish to remove from the navigation pane.

3.2.3.1 Viewing Sites with All Device Types

1. Click MCT button.

2. Click MCT Options.

The following dialog appears:

3. Check View all device type in tree view.

All NSG devices appear in the site. NSG devices of type other than the selected filter are italicized and appear in gray.

To view all devices in the site, click here

Page 32: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group)

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 29 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3.3 Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group)To configure NSG devices, add them to the MCT database. Once you added an NSG, you can set its configuration parameters. You can add NSG devices by the following:

A single device with default values

Range of NSG devices with default values

Single NSG device with cloned records

Range of NSG devices with cloned records

All of these options are grouped in the MCT ribbon in the Editor group.

3.3.1 Understanding the Editor Group The Editor group includes options that are enabled when one of the following is selected as the picture below shows:

a site

a device

Details section

The following table lists the options with a short explanation:

Table 3-2: Editor Group Parameters

Editor Option Enabled Condition Reference

Add MCT node is selected to add a site

Site is selected to add a device.

See, 3.2.2 Adding, Renaming and Deleting a Site on page 26

See 3.3.2 Adding a Device on page 30.

Add Range A site is selected. See 3.3.3 Adding a Range of NSGs with Default Values on page 30.

Delete A site is selected to delete a site.

A device is selected to delete a device.

See, 3.2.2 Adding, Renaming and Deleting a Site on page 26

See, 3.3.6 Deleting an NSG Device on page 32

Site is selected - enabled Editor options

Device is selected - enabled Editor options

Details section is selected - some enabled Editor options

Page 33: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group)

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 30 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3.3.2 Adding a Device To add a single device with default values, do the following:

1. Select the site node and click Add.

A new record is created at the bottom of the list. The new record uses default values.

2. Enter values for the parameters that are not part of the template, such as IP and MAC addresses.

NOTE: The ETH1 IP address always comes up blank and must be configured. This address must be unique across the MCT database since it is used to identify the NSG device.

3. Click Save.

3.3.3 Adding a Range of NSGs with Default ValuesTo create a group of NSG devices with default configuration, use the Add Range option. The created devices have default configuration as defined in MCT Options > Defaults page. The Add Range command automatically increments the ETH1 IP address of the new devices, and allows you to auto-increment the GbE IP addresses as well.

To add a range of NSG records1. Select the site you wish to add to it multiple NSG devices.

2. Click Add Range.

Clone A device is selected See, 3.3.4 Adding a Single Device with Cloned Values on page 31.

Multi Clone A device is selected See, 3.3.5 Adding a Range of NSGs with Cloned Values on page 32.

Set Bulk Offset

In M-CMTS tab, an M-CMTS session is selected.

See, Setting DOCSIS Sync Compensation Offset on page 128.

Sort Virtual Devices (ISA) tab is selected. See

Back Moving between tabsIt allows to return to the last tab you viewed.

See 3.5 Finding the Parameters You Want on page 35

Forward Moving between tabsIt allows to return to the tab you were on before you clicked the Back button.

See 3.5 Finding the Parameters You Want on page 35

Find When one of the MCT page is selected, such as Device Information, Details, Navigation pane etc’.

See 3.5.1 Find Feature on page 35.

Table 3-2: Editor Group Parameters

Editor Option Enabled Condition Reference

Page 34: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group)

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 31 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

The Add Range dialog appears:

3. In From IP Address, enter the Eth1 IP address of the first NSG device to be added.

4. In Quantity, enter the number of NSG devices to be added.

5. In Increase GbE Unicast IP, check to create an automatic range of IPs.

6. In Base Unicast IP, enter an IP address. The IPs in the range are increased from the entered IP address.

7. Click Ok.

To clone a range of NSGs1. Select the NSG you want to duplicate and click Multi Clone.

The Duplicate NSG to Range dialog appears.

2. In From IP Address, enter the IP addresses for the ETH1 port of the new NSGs.

3. In Quantity, enter the number of NSG records to be added.

4. In Increase GbE Unicast IP, check to create an automatic range of IPs.

5. In Base Unicast IP, enter an IP address. The IPs in the range are increased from the entered IP address.

6. Click OK.

NSG records are added to the site of the selected NSG device. The newly added records appear with the same configuration as the cloned device

3.3.4 Adding a Single Device with Cloned ValuesIf you wish to create an NSG device with configuration that is meant to be very similar to an existing NSG device, add the device by cloning the record of the existing NSG. Once you clone the record, modify the information to fit your specific NSG requirements.

Page 35: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group)

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 32 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

The clone procedure does not copy properties that must remain unique (e.g. IP and MAC addresses). Such fields remain empty in the duplicated records.

To clone a single device1. Select the NSG device whose record you wish to clone.

2. Click Clone.

A record is added to the list of NSGs with the same values as of the source NSG.

3.3.5 Adding a Range of NSGs with Cloned ValuesIf you wish to create NSG devices with configuration that is meant to be very similar to an existing NSG device, add the new devices by duplicating the record of the existing NSG. Once you duplicated the records, modify the information to fit your specific NSG requirements. MCT allows you to duplicate multiple records in one operation.

The duplication procedure does not copy properties that must remain unique (e.g. IP and MAC addresses). Such fields remain empty in the duplicated records.

To clone a range of NSGs1. Select the NSG you want to duplicate and click Multi Clone.

The Duplicate NSG to Range dialog appears.

2. In From IP Address, enter the IP addresses for the ETH1 port of the new NSGs.

3. In Quantity, enter the number of NSG records to be added.

4. In Increase GbE Unicast IP, check to create an automatic range of IPs.

5. In Base Unicast IP, enter an IP address. The IPs in the range are increased from the entered IP address.

6. Click OK.

NSG records are added to the site of the selected NSG device. The newly added records appear with the same configuration as the cloned device

3.3.6 Deleting an NSG Device To delete a device

1. Do one of the following:

Select the device to be removed and click Delete.

The device is deleted from the database and is removed from the Navigation pane.

2. Click Save.

Page 36: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group)

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 33 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3.3.7 Setting Device Eth1 IP Address and Information

As soon as you add a device, enter the Eth1 IP address of the device. The Eth1 IP address always comes up blank and must be configured. This address must be unique across the MCT database since it is used for identifying the NSG device.

To enter the Eth1 IP address1. Do either of the following:

In the Tree View section, type the required Eth1 IP address

Or

In Details, select the Platform tab and in ETH1, enter the required Eth1 IP address.

In Device Details the Eth1 IP address is updated as entered.

Once you have entered the Eth1 IP address of the device, configure the device information details as explained below. The details should allow to easily identify the device

To define device information Enter the following details:

Table 3-3: Device Information Parameters

Parameter Explanation

Device Name Enter the name of the device to allow easy identification of the physical device.

Rack The number of the rack holding this NSG. The Rack and Slot ID fields are provided so that you can associate the physical NSG chassis with this entry.

Slot The number of the slot in the rack holding this NSG. The Rack and Slot ID fields are provided so that you can associate the physical NSG chassis with this entry.

Comments Enter any comments to allow easy identification.

NMX Network Group The NMX Network Group (also referred to as Map) to which this NSG belongs.

Actual Firmware Version View the actual firmware

Expected Firmware Version Select the firmware you wish to download on the device

Page 37: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Supporting Various NSG Versions

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 34 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3.4 Supporting Various NSG Versions To allow full compatibility between MCT and NSG firmware versions of various NSG types, MCT is furnished with the Version Support mechanism. This mechanism consists of a table that lists supported baseline versions and expected versions:

Base line version - a release of an NSG version with a new configuration database structure. This database may be common also to proceeding releases. These releases are called Expected versions.

Expected version - a release of an NSG version which utilizes a configuration database structure of a previous release. That is, a baseline version.

3.4.1 Customizing the List of Supported Versions of NSG FirmwareTo manage the firmware versions, use the Supported Versions page. The Supported Version page allows you to customize the list of expected versions only by doing the following:

To add expected versions only. Each added version is based on a baseline version. To add an expected version, first consult Harmonic Customer Support. Harmonic support personal will inform you of the baseline version required for adding the expected version.

To delete expected versions only.

To de-activate a baseline version. Once you de-activate a base line version, you remove it from the Expected Firmware Versions list in the Device Information section.

To add an expected version

NOTE: Add an expected version only after consulting with Harmonic Customer Support and obtaining the required baseline version.

1. Click MCT button.

2. Click MCT Options.

3. In the Navigation pane, select Versions.

Page 38: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Finding the Parameters You Want

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 35 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

The MCT Supported Firmware page appears:

4. Open the Type list and select the required NSG type.

The Supported Versions list is updated to display the supported baseline versions for the selected NSG type. By default, all baseline versions are active. That is, all baseline versions appear in Detailed Information, under Expected Firmware Version.

5. To add the required version, click Add.

A blank row appears.

6. Open the Baseline Version list and select the baseline version.

7. In Expected Version, type the required customized version in the following pattern: xx.xx.xx.xxx

8. To allow the customized versions of the baseline version to appear in the Expected Firmware Version, verify that Active is selected.

9. To apply changes and to close the page, click OK.

The added version appears in the Expected Firmware Version list. You can select it to allow MCT to display the tabs that this version supports. Now you can synchronize MCT with the NSG devices.

3.5 Finding the Parameters You WantTo find the attribute you need and to move along between the various MCT sections and tabs, use the following buttons/features included in the Editor group:

Back

Forward

Find

To move between the tabs, use the Back and Forward buttons. See Table 3-2: Editor Group Parameters on page 29.

3.5.1 Find FeatureThe find feature allows you to quickly locate a parameter in the MCT tabs and in the selected section of the MCT. Selected sections may be one of the following:

Navigation pane

Page 39: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Finding the Parameters You Want

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 36 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Device Information section

Details section and any sub section of the Details section. The search applies to the selected tab only.

To search MCT1. Select the required section to search and find the parameter.

2. Click the Find button .

3. In Text to Find, enter the parameter you wish to find.

4. Click Next.

5. To browse through the found items, click Previous, or Next.

Sub section of the Details section

Page 40: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 37 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3.6 Getting to Know the MCT ActionsThe following MCT actions are organized in the Ribbon in the Actions group. All of these actions affect the NSGs:

Launch Web Client

Download Firmware

Reset

Set Clock

Change Password - enabled for NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG 9000 only.

Convert to NSG 9000-6G - enabled for NSG 9000 only.

Convert to NSG 9000-40G - enabled for NSG 9000-6G only.

3.6.1 Launching NSG Web ClientIn case you need to open the web client of an NSG, do the following:

1. Select the required NSG.

2. On the Home tab, in the Actions group, click Launch Web Client.

The main page of the device web client opens.

3.6.2 Resetting NSGsYou can reset (power-cycled) the NSGs through the MCT. Resetting an NSG interrupts services in the device.

1. Select the NSGs you want to reset.

2. On the Home tab, in the Actions group, click Reset.

The Action Log dialog appears. In MCT, in Device Information section, the icon appears next to the record of the device.

3. Wait until in Action Log, Finish is enabled.

4. Click Finish.

The device is up and running and in MCT, in Device Information section, the icon appears.

3.6.3 Setting the Internal NSG ClockYou can set the NSG's internal clock either individually or synchronize a number of NSG internal clocks together using the MCT.

1. Select the NSGs you want to set their clock.

2. On the Home tab, in the Actions group, click Set Clock.3. In the message that appears, click Yes.

Actions in NSG 9000 filter Actions in NSG 9000-6G filter

Page 41: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 38 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

The Action Log dialog appears.

4. Wait until Finish is enabled.

5. Click Finish.

NOTE: To change a password, see 3.6.4 Changing NSG Password on page 38.

3.6.4 Changing NSG Password

NOTE: This option is available for NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG 9000 only.

You can change both the Monitor and the Configure password.

To Change the NSG password via the MCT1. Select the NSG or NSG devices you want to change passwords for.

2. On the Home tab, in the Actions group, click Change Password.

The following window appears:

3. To change the password for Monitor access level, select Change Monitor Password.

4. To change the password for Configure access level, select Change Configure Password.

5. Enter the New Monitor/Configure Password.

6. Confirm the New Password data.

7. Select OK. A message box appears: This action will cause the selected NSGs to change their passwords. Do you want to continue?

8. Select Yes in the message box. The Action Log dialog appears.

9. Wait until the action is complete.

10. Click Finish.

3.6.5 Converting NSG 9000 to NSG 9000-6GTo convert NSG 9000 to NSG 9000-6G, do the following:

Get NSG 9000 configuration and save the configuration of the NSG 9000 device. Save the NSG 9000 configuration under a unique file name.

Install hardware components to enable the device to work as an NSG 9000-6G device

Page 42: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 39 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Convert NSG 9000 to NSG 9000-6G

Configure NSG 9000-6G unique parameters

Send configuration to device

MCT converts any NSG 9000 version to NSG 9000-6G version 2.1 only! That is, MCT Details section displays the configurable parameters of version 2.1 only. For MCT to display the configurable parameters of a different version, select in Device Information > Expected Firmware Version the required expected version. See 3.4 Supporting Various NSG Versions on page 34.

3.6.5.1 Getting NSG 9000 Configuration

To save the current configuration of the NSG 9000 device, save it to the database. See 3.1.3 Backing Up MCT Databases on page 25.

Conversion is allowed only if the following configuration applies:

The NSG 9000 device is working in PM scrambling mode. If not, change the scrambling mode to PM Scrambling prior to the conversion. NSG 9000-6G supports PM scrambling only.

The NSG 9000 device emulation template is set to Normal. If not, change the emulation template to Normal prior to the conversion.

3.6.5.2 Installing Required Hardware

To convert NSG 9000 to NSG 9000-6G, replace/install the following hardware components:

Replace the NSG 9000 main board with the main board of NSG 9000-6G

Replace, or install the QAM-RF modules. All QAM-RF modules should be NSG-8R1G module type.

For details and instructions, see NSG 9000-6G HW and Installation User Guide.

3.6.5.3 Converting NSG 9000 to NSG 9000-6G

During the conversion, the following takes place:

The device is removed from the NSG 9000 filter and appears in the NSG 9000-6G filter with its IP address.

MCT adjusts the configurable parameters to match NSG 9000-6G version 2.1 and it retains the values configured for NSG 9000. The configurable parameters unique to NSG 9000-6G are added with default values. MCT handles all QAM-RF modules as modules with up to eight QAM-RF channels per RF port. The additional QAMs appear with default values.

At the end of the conversion process, configure the features that are unique to NSG 9000-6G. For example, configure the parameters of the additional QAMs.

To convert1. While in NSG 9000 filter, select the required device(s) to be converted.

2. On the Home tab, in the Actions group, click Convert to NSG 9000-6G .

NOTE: The Convert to NSG 9000-6G button is enabled in the NSG 9000 filter only.

Page 43: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 40 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Once the conversion is complete, the NSG 9000 devices are removed from the NSG 9000 filter and appear under the NSG 9000-6G filter. The Convert icon appears next to the converted devices.

3. Continue by configuring the configurable NSG 9000-6G parameters.

3.6.5.4 NSG 9000-6G Unique Parameters

See Configuring NSG 9000-6G on page 133.

3.6.5.5 Sending Configuration to device

See 3.8.3 Sending Configuration to NSGs on page 55.

Once you execute a action against the device, like Send, the Convert icon is removed.

3.6.6 Converting NSG 9000-6G to NSG 9000-40G

NOTE: The following section refers to conversion from NSG 9000-6G version 2.6 to NSG 9000-40G version 3.1.

To convert NSG 9000-6G to NSG 9000-40G, do the following:

Get NSG 9000-6G configuration and save the configuration of the NSG 9000-6G device. Save the NSG 9000-6G configuration under a unique file name.

Install hardware components to enable the device to work as an NSG 9000-40G device

Convert NSG 9000-6G to NSG 9000-40G

Send to device

Optional - Configure NSG 9000-40G unique parameters and send to device

3.6.6.1 Getting NSG 9000-6G Configuration

To save the current configuration of the NSG 9000-6G device, save it to the database. See 3.1.3 Backing Up MCT Databases on page 25.

Convert icon Conversion is to version 2.1

Page 44: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 41 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Conversion is allowed only if the following configuration applies:

The NSG 9000-6G device is working in PM scrambling mode. If not, change the scrambling mode to PM Scrambling prior to the conversion. NSG 9000-40G supports PM scrambling only.

The NSG 9000-6G device emulation template is set to Normal. If not, change the emulation template to Normal prior to the conversion.

The NSG 9000-6G device is working in Annex B. If it is working in Annex A or C, change it prior to conversion.

In NSG 9000-6G Module Redundancy is disabled. If not, disable Module Redundancy prior to conversion.

In NSG 9000-6G the power lever per QAM is in the range of 44-52 dBmV.

In NSG 9000-6G the Hold Time in the NGOD tab should be 10 seconds and up.

The NSG 9000-6G device mode is set to Standalone.

In NSG 9000-6G, the frequency steps of adjacent channels should be a multiplication of 6MHz.

The NSG 9000-6G is working with one of the following QAM managers: VOD, NGOD, or ISA.

3.6.6.2 Installing Required Hardware

To convert NSG 9000-6G to NSG 9000-40G, replace/install the following hardware components:

Replace the NSG 9000-6G main board with the main board of NSG 9000-40G

Replace, or install the QAM-RF modules. All QAM-RF modules should be NSG-36R1G module type.

Replace the NSG 9000-6G front panel - front panel of NSG 9000-40G should have the Turbo icon.

Replace the NSG 9000-6G power supply - power supply units for NSG 9000-40G should have a Harmonic part number with the suffix 02 or 03.

For details and instructions, see NSG 9000-6G HW and Installation User Guide.

3.6.6.3 Converting NSG 9000-6G to NSG 9000-40G

During the conversion, the following takes place:

The device is removed from the NSG 9000-6G filter and appears in the NSG 9000-40G filter with its IP address.

MCT adjusts the configurable parameters to match NSG 9000-40G version 3.1 and it retains the values configured for NSG 9000-6G. The configurable parameters unique to NSG 9000-40G are added with default values. MCT handles all QAM-RF modules as modules with up to 24 QAM-RF channels per RF port. The additional QAMs appear with default values.

At the end of the conversion process, configure the features that are unique to NSG 9000-40G. For example, configure the parameters of the additional QAMs, speed to GbE ports and more.

Page 45: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 42 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

To convert1. While in NSG 9000-6G filter, select the required device(s) to be converted.

2. On the Home tab, in the Actions group, click Convert to NSG 9000-40G .

NOTE: The Convert to NSG 9000-40G button is enabled in the NSG 9000-6G filter only.

Once the conversion is complete, the NSG 9000-6G devices are removed from the NSG 9000-6G filter and appear under the NSG 9000-40G filter. The Convert icon appears next to the converted devices.

3. Send configuration to the device. See 3.8.3 Sending Configuration to NSGs on page 55. Once you execute an action against the device, like Send, the Convert icon is removed.

4. Reboot the device.

5. Continue by configuring the configurable NSG 9000-40G parameters.

3.6.6.4 NSG 9000-40G Unique Parameters

See Configuring NSG 9000-40G on page 177.

3.6.7 Action Status DialogWhen you activate an action that has an impact on the NSGs, or checks configuration against the NSGs, the MCT indicates the following:

Action progress by means of the Working and Completed progress bars in the Action Log dialog.

Action status by means of the Status and Info sections in the Action log dialog.

Status of the operation by means of a status icon that appears in the row heading.

Convert icon Conversion is to version 3.1

Page 46: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 43 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3.6.7.1 Reading Action Log Dialog

The Action Log includes the following:

Title bar - indicates the procedure that is currently taking place.

Status - once the procedure is complete, the Status section displays details regarding the execution of the procedure per each device. If the procedure fails details are displayed in red.

Info... - click this button to view an .XML file sent by the device. This file includes error indications when the action failed.

Working progress bar - displays that the action is taking place.

Complete progress bar - progresses to display the completion of the action relatively to the number of required devices. In addition, a counter updates the number of NSGs on which the action was executed and completed out of the total required NSGs.

3.6.7.2 Reading Action Status Icons

The following table lists the available action icons

When you activate an action that has an impact on the NSGs, the MCT indicates the status of the operation by means of a status icon that appears in row heading. The following table lists the available action icons:

Table 3-4: Action Status Icons

Icon Explanation

The last executed action completed successfully

The last executed action completed successfully, but some discrepancies exist. Usually appears after executing the Compare with Device action. See 3.8.1 Comparing Configurations on page 53.

Title bar - type of actions

Action status:Green - successfulRed - failed

working progress bar

Counter

Complete progress bar

Action completed on some of the required NSGs. Working shows that the action is performed against additional required NSGs

Action completed on all of the required NSGs. Working shows that the action was performed against all of the required NSGs

Info button to view an .XML file sent by the device

Page 47: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 44 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

The following picture shows a common action status

3.7 Downloading NSG FirmwareVia MCT, you may download the firmware of multiple NSG devices. The number of NSG devices that may be upgraded simultaneously is unlimited. MCT supports the following firmware download procedures:

Firmware download for NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG 9000. See 3.7.1 Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG 9000-3G on page 45.

Firmware download for NSG 9000-6G. See 3.7.2 Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG 9000-6G on page 46.

Firmware download for NSG 9000-40G. See 3.7.3 Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG 9000-40G on page 51.

The required action failed. For example, could not execute Get from Device because device firmware is unsupported.

MCT and NSG are fully synchronized

MCT and NSG are not synchronized

When resetting the device. When reset is complete, and the device is

up and running, this icon changes to this icon.

Firmware installation should be finalized. Any action that affects the device is not applied and Reset cancels the firmware installation.

The whole row is selected.

An attribute is selected

Indicates that the device was converted from NSG 9000 to NSG 9000-6G. Once you execute an action against the device, the icon is removed.

Table 3-4: Action Status Icons

Icon Explanation

Not-synchronized, last action failed

Synchronized, last action succeeded

Not-synchronized, last action partially succeeded

Not-synchronized, last action succeeded

Page 48: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 45 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

The firmware download options are organized in the Ribbon in the Firmware Installation group:

Download Firmware - click to start the procedure and allocate the firmware file.

Finalize & Reboot - Applies to NSG 9000-6G version 2.1 & up only. Click to finalize the download and to reboot the device with the new firmware. Click this button when Manual is selected in the Firmware Installation dialog.

Abort Installation - Applies to NSG 9000-6G version 2.1 & up only. Click to abort the installation.

3.7.1 Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG 9000-3G

NOTE: To upgrade from NSG 9000 version 01.03.09 or 01.04.05.x to 01.05.00, use MCT 9.1 only.

To download the NSG Firmware1. Select the devices you wish to upgrade their firmware.

2. Synchronize MCT with the required devices by clicking Get From Device.

3. Save the database file.

4. For backup purposes, save database under another name by selecting MCT Button > Save As.

5. In Device Information, in Expected Version, select the expected version. For managing NSG supported versions, see 3.4.1 Customizing the List of Supported Versions of NSG Firmware on page 34.

The Details section is updated to display the tabs of the selected version.

Page 49: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 46 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

6. On the Home tab, in the Firmware Installation group, click Download Firmware.

A confirmation message appears.

7. Click Yes.8. In the dialog that appears, browse to the firmware file.

9. Click Open.

The Action Log dialog appears. The device will reboot with the new firmware. Once the download is complete for all NSGs, the Finish button is enabled.

10. Click Finish.

11. Configure the devices via MCT. See Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) on page 70 and Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up on page 110.

12. On the Home tab, in the Synchronize group, click Send to Device.

3.7.2 Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG 9000-6GTo upgrade NSG 9000-6G, select either of the following methods:

Upgrade tool - an Internal server upgrade. See 3.7.2.2 Downloading using Installer on page 47

Legacy upgrade - an External server upgrade. See 3.7.3.3 Upgrading NSG9000-40G Firmware Using an External Server on page 51.

Supported version and relevant tabs

Supported version and relevant tabs

Page 50: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 47 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3.7.2.1 Upgrading Limitations

Upgrading a firmware depends on the Main Board Storage Format. The following table lists the upgrading firmware limitations due to the supported storage format:

3.7.2.2 Downloading using Installer

The NSG 9000-6G firmware is packaged and delivered within the installer application. The installer turns firmware upgrade into an easy and straightforward procedure. To upgrade using the NSG installer refer to the following instructions.

NSG installer includes the new firmware package. The name of the NSG installer indicates the device type and the firmware version. For example: NSG9K6G-2.6.4.3-1-Installer-v1.1.5.exe, where:

NOTE: Firmware upgrade is service affecting.

To download NSG firmware for NSG 9000-6G devices using Installer

NOTE: If you wish to save the configuration prior to upgrade, save the database file. See 3.1 Managing MCT Database on page 24.

1. Select the devices you wish to upgrade their firmware.

2. In Device Information, in Expected Version, select the expected version. For managing NSG supported versions, see 3.4.1 Customizing the List of Supported Versions of NSG Firmware on page 34.

The Details section is updated to display the tabs of the selected version.

3. On the Home tab, in the Firmware Installation group, click Download Firmware.

A confirmation message appears.

4. Click Yes.

Table 3-5: Upgrading Limitations

Main Board Storage Format Supported by Versions Upgrade/downgrade limitations

Single partition NSG9K6G ver. 2.0NSG9K6G ver 2.2 or higher

Cannot run NSG9K6G ver. 2.1

Dual partition NSG9K6G ver. 2.1 or higher Cannot run with NSG9K6G ver. 2.0

NSG9K6G device type

2.6.4.3-1 firmware version

Installer application name

Page 51: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 48 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

The following dialog appears:

5. Open the Upgrade Type list and select Standalone NSG Installer.

The following dialog appears:

6. To locate the upgrade firmware file, click Browse.

Installer file

Page 52: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 49 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

7. Click Open.

8. Click Install.

The Action log dialog appears.

Once Finish is enabled, the device is running with the newly installed firmware and the firmware installation process is complete.

3.7.2.3 Downloading Firmware of NSG9000-6G using an External server

Firmware upgrade of NSG 9000-6G is based on HTTP download and requires an HTTP server on the LAN. To download, you need the following:

Either of the following HTTP servers as the Upgrade server:

Apache Web server - Harmonic provides a customized installation package

Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager - Comes free with Windows XP Professional and Windows 2000

The HTTP server is configured with the Harmonic/NSG9K6G directory

The HTTP server and the MCT computer are connected to the same network

The firmware installation procedure of NSG 9000-6G version 2.1 and up allows to continue working with the device and to finalize and reboot the device at your own convenience. In addition, you can monitor the installation process via the Info button in the Action Log dialog.

The following download procedure applies for both NSG 9000-6G version 2.0 and version 2.1 & up unless else is indicated.

To download NSG firmware for NSG 9000-6G devices

NOTE: If you wish to save the configuration prior to upgrade, save the database file. See 3.1 Managing MCT Database on page 24.

1. Select the devices you wish to upgrade their firmware.

2. In Device Information, in Expected Version, select the expected version. For managing NSG supported versions, see 3.4.1 Customizing the List of Supported Versions of NSG Firmware on page 34.

The Details section is updated to display the tabs of the selected version.

3. On the Home tab, in the Firmware Installation group, click Download Firmware.

A confirmation message appears.

4. Click Yes.

Installer file

Page 53: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 50 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

The following dialog appears:

5. In Repository Server IP Address, verify that the IP address of the HTTP server appears.

6. To populate the list of expected versions, click Get Available Versions.7. Open the Expected Firmware Version list and select the required version.

8. For NSG 9000-6G 2.1 & up onlyOpen the Finalize & Reboot after Install list and select either of the following:

Automatic - to automatically reboot after installing the firmware

Manual - to finalize installation and to reboot at your convenience.

NOTE: Manual is available for NSG 9000-6G dual partition only. For single partition, select Automatic. To check partition type, select the Platform tab, Partition Type.

9. Click Install.

The Action log dialog appears.

NOTE: In MCT 9.6 a pre-upgrade script is executed. If the script fails, record the error number and call Harmonic Customer Support.

10. For NSG 9000-6G 2.0 onlyWait until Finish is enabled in the Action Log dialog. Once Finish is enabled, the process is complete and the device is running with the newly installed firmware.

For NSG 9000-6G 2.1 & up onlyContinue working. You may check the progress of the installation by viewing Status and clicking Info in the Action Log dialog.

If Automatic is selected in Finalize & Reboot after Install, once Finish is enabled, the device is running with the newly installed firmware and the firmware installation process is complete.

If Manual is selected in Finalize & Reboot after Install, once Finish is enabled, the Waiting for Finalizing & Reboot icon appears next to the device IP address and the following applies:

The device is running with the previous installed version

Any action that affects the device such as Set Clock, Purge ECM, is not applied.

If you reset the device, the firmware installation is removed and you need to re-start the installation.

Page 54: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 51 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

11. For NSG 9000-6G dual partition onlyIf Manual is selected in Finalize & Reboot after Install, click Finalize & Reboot to complete the firmware download.

NOTE: Download is complete only after reboot.

3.7.3 Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG 9000-40GTo upgrade NSG 9000-6G, select either of the following methods:

Upgrade tool - an Internal server upgrade

Legacy upgrade - an External server upgrade

3.7.3.1 Upgrading Limitations

Upgrading NSG 9000-40G version 3.0 to version 3.1 is prohibited.

Downgrading NSG 9000-40G version 3.1 to version 3.0 is prohibited.

NOTE: If you wish to save the configuration prior to upgrade, save the database file. See 3.1 Managing MCT Database on page 24.

3.7.3.2 Upgrading NSG9000-40G Firmware With Installer

To download NSG firmware for NSG9000-40G using installer, see page 47.

3.7.3.3 Upgrading NSG9000-40G Firmware Using an External Server

Firmware upgrade of NSG 9000-40G is based on HTTP download and requires an HTTP server on the LAN. To download, you need the following:

Either of the following HTTP servers as the Upgrade server:

Apache Web server - Harmonic provides a customized installation package

Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager - Comes free with Windows XP Professional and Windows 2000

The HTTP server is configured with the Harmonic/NSG9K40G directory

The HTTP server and the MCT computer are connected to the same network

The firmware installation procedure of NSG 9000-40G allows to continue working with the device and to finalize and reboot the device at your own convenience. In addition, you can monitor the installation process via the Info button in the Action Log dialog.

1. Select the devices you wish to upgrade their firmware.

2. In Device Information, in Expected Version, select the expected version. For managing NSG supported versions, see 3.4.1 Customizing the List of Supported Versions of NSG Firmware on page 34.

The Details section is updated to display the tabs of the selected version.

3. On the Home tab, in the Firmware Installation group, click Download Firmware.

A confirmation message appears.

4. Click Yes.

Page 55: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 52 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

The following dialog appears:

5. In Repository Server IP Address, verify that the IP address of the HTTP server appears.

6. To populate the list of expected versions, click Get Available Versions.7. Open the Expected Firmware Version list and select the required version.

8. Open the Finalize & Reboot after Install list and select either of the following:

Automatic - to automatically reboot after installing the firmware

Manual - to finalize installation and to reboot at your convenience.

9. Click Install.

The Action log dialog appears.

10. Continue working. You may check the progress of the installation by viewing Status and clicking Info in the Action Log dialog.

If Automatic is selected in Finalize & Reboot after Install, once Finish is enabled, the device is running with the newly installed firmware and the firmware installation process is complete.

If Manual is selected in Finalize & Reboot after Install, once Finish is enabled, the Waiting for Finalizing & Reboot icon appears next to the device IP address and the following applies:

The device is running with the previous installed version

Any action that affects the device such as Set Clock, Purge ECM, is not applied.

If you reset the device, the firmware installation is removed and you need to re-start the installation.

11. If Manual is selected in Finalize & Reboot after Install, click Finalize & Reboot to complete the firmware download.

3.7.3.4 Aborting the Installation

If you wish to cancel the firmware installation, click Abort Installation.

Page 56: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics MCT and NSGs Synchronization

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 53 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3.8 MCT and NSGs Synchronization

An NSG is out of sync when the configuration data stored in it is different from the configuration data stored in the corresponding MCT database. If such a discrepancy occurs, you can use MCT tools to synchronize the two. In general, such situation should be avoided but may occur in a number of specific cases such as:

Uncontrolled changes to MCT configuration data.

If a new MCT database is setup for an NSG site that was already configured by other means.

To check the synchronization status, you can run a comparison between the MCT database and the NSGs. In this case MCT only reads the discrepancies that may exist.

NOTE: MCT may approach up to 20 NSG devices at the same time. If you cancel a synchronization procedure, cancellation applies to the following batch of 20 devices. To verify the exact devices that synchronization was applied to, check the log.

3.8.1 Comparing ConfigurationsThis features allows to compare between the device configuration on MCT and on the NSG itself.

1. Select the NSGs to validate.

2. On the Home tab, in the Synchronization group, click Compare with Device.

The Action Log dialog appears.

In this case, MCT reads the configuration details of the selected NSGs, one by one. Comments regarding the completion of the action per device, appear in the Action Log.

3. Wait until Finish is enabled.

4. Click Finish.

In MCT, in Device Information next to the selected NSGs the following icons appear:

If the configuration details are synchronized the icon appears next to the device record.

If discrepancies exist, the icon appears next to the device record. See following section.

3.8.1.1 Reading Compare with Device Details

If following Compare with Device, discrepancies exist, you may view Compare with Device details.

To read compare with device details

1. Double click the icon.

Page 57: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics MCT and NSGs Synchronization

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 54 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

The Comparison Results for <IP Address> page appears.

2. View the results with the following guidelines:

3.8.2 Synchronizing ConfigurationsTo synchronize the two, you need to get the current configuration data from the NSGs into the MCT database.

To synchronize by importing the NSG configuration1. Select NSGs to synchronize.

2. On the Home tab, in the Synchronization group, click Get From Device.

The Action Log dialog appears.

3. Wait until Finish is enabled.

4. Click Finish.

When completed successfully the icon appears next to the NSGs.

Table 3-6: Comparison Results

Item Explanation Comment

Navigation pane - Red text Tabs with attributes with discrepancies

Click to view this attribute only

RowID Number of record Relevant when there is more than one instance

Filed The attribute with discrepancies

Blue column MCT value

Green column NSG value

Available tabs. Tabs in red are tabs with discrepancies

Attributes with discrepancies

MCT value NSG value

Page 58: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Exporting Information

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 55 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

When Get from Target is finished and the device is

3.8.3 Sending Configuration to NSGs1. Select the required device(s).

If Site node is selected, MCT sends NSG configuration to NSG devices of the selected site. If Device nodes are selected, MCT sends configuration to all selected NSGs.

2. On the Home tab, in the Synchronization group, click Send to Device.

The Action Log dialog appears.

3. Wait until Finish is enabled.

4. Click Finish.

When completed successfully the icon appears next to the NSGs.

The following table lists limitations of Get from Device and Send to Device options:

3.9 Exporting Information You can export device configuration to the following:

NMX, see 3.9.1 Exporting to NMX on page 56.

SDV Session Manager of BigBand, see 3.9.2 Exporting to SDV Session Manager of BigBand on page 57.

Table 3-7: Get and Send Limitations

NSG Configuration in MCT Actual NSG Configuration Get From Device Send to Device

Type: 8108/9116Ver: PM

Type: 8108/9116Ver: Non PM

Supported, MCT changes encryption mode as per device

Not Supported, MCT displays an error message. Change unit type.

Type: 8108/9116Ver: Non PM

Type: 8108/9116Ver: PM

Supported, MCT changes encryption mode as per device.

Not Supported, MCT displays an error message. Change unit type.

Type: anyVer: PM/Non PM

Type: any but other than MCT

Not Supported, MCT displays an error messages

Not Supported, MCT displays an error messages

Type: X Ver: Supported

Type: X Ver: supported version different than MCT

Supported, MCT changes GUI as per device version

Not Supported,MCT displays an error message.

Type: X Ver: Supported

Type: Y (different than X)Ver: supported version different than MCT

Not Supported, MCT displays an error messages

Not Supported,MCT displays an error message.

Type: any Ver: Supported

Type: any Ver: Un supported

Not Supported, MCT displays an error message

Not Supported, MCT displays an error message

Page 59: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Exporting Information

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 56 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

SDV Session Manager of Cisco, see 3.9.3 Exporting to SDV Session Manager of Cisco on page 57.

You can also export the device up time, see

3.9.1 Exporting to NMXOnce you have configured a large number of NSG units, you may export their data to NMX, and use NMX for monitoring the alarms status and reporting on QAM utilization. MCT exports the data into a template file that NMX can import as a new NMX map. The file name is as follows: <database name>.tpt. The file is saved in the same location as the MCT database.

Each <database name>.tpt file includes the selected NSGs with the same NMX Network Group. For each group of NSGs with the same NMX Network Group, NMX creates a unique map. To define NMX Network Group, 2.1.9 Device Information Section on page 19.

To export NSGs configuration to NMX1. Verify that the MCT database you wish to export is open.

2. Click MCT button.

3. Select Export > Export to NMX template.

The MCT to NMX dialog box appears:

4. By default you may export all network groups. If no, select Single Network Group and select the network group for exporting.

5. Click Export.6. Once the procedure is complete and the (database name).tpt file is created, a message

appears notifying you that the procedure is complete.

NOTE: When you export a network group, each network group has its own .tpt file.

7. In NMX, in Network View tab, right click a site and select Create Network Group from Template.

The Create Network Group from Template dialog opens.

8. In Advanced, select Use Original Values.9. Select Use Local Template File and navigate to the required .tpt file and open it.

10. In Object Information, in Name enter the required Network Group name.

11. Click Ok.

NMX creates a Network group with all the NSG devices included in the imported template.

Page 60: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Exporting Information

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 57 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3.9.2 Exporting to SDV Session Manager of BigBandOnce you have configured a large number of NSG units, you may export their data to the SDV Session manager of BigBand (SBSS). MCT exports the data into a template XML file that SBSS can use. MCT creates for each device such a file, and if virtual devices are configured, a file is also created for each virtual device.

To export NSGs configuration to SBSS1. Verify that you have saved the MCT database you wish to export.

2. Select the devices that you wish to export their configuration to the SBSS file.

3. Click MCT button.

4. Select Export > Export to SBSS.

The Export to SBSS dialog box appears:

5. In the Output Folder browse to the required location for placing the XML file that complies with SBSS.

6. In Settings, do the following:

Number of Session per Channel - the default is 16. Enter the required number of shell sessions per channel

RF Ports Admin Status - select one of the following:Device Value - RF ports status is as per the edgeQAM configurationDisabled - RF ports should be disabledEnabled - RF ports should be enabled

Include Virtual QAMs From - by default you can include virtual QAMs from 1 - 255. You can indicate a range as required.

Exclude Disabled QAMs - when selected, QAMs that are disabled are not included in the file

7. Click Export.

For each selected device, an XML file that complies with SBSS specifications is created at the indicated location.

3.9.3 Exporting to SDV Session Manager of CiscoOnce you have configured a large number of NSG units, you may export their data to the SDV Session Manager of Cisco (USRM). MCT exports the data into a template XML file that USRM can use. MCT creates for each device such a file, and if virtual devices are configured, a file is also created for each virtual device.

To export NSGs configuration to USRM

Page 61: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Exporting Information

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 58 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

1. Verify that you have saved the MCT database you wish to export.

2. Select the devices that you wish to export their configuration to the USRM file.

3. Click MCT button.

4. Select Export > Export to USRM.

The Export to USRM dialog box appears:

5. In the Output Folder browse to the required location for placing the XML file that complies with USRM.

6. In Settings, do the following:

RF Ports Admin Status - select one of the following:Device Value - RF ports status is as per the edgeQAM configurationDisabled - RF ports should be disabledEnabled - RF ports should be enabled

Include Virtual QAMs From - by default you can include virtual QAMs from 1 - 255. You can indicate a range as required.

Exclude Disabled QAMs - when selected, QAMs that are disabled are not included in the file

7. Click Export.

For each selected device, an XML file that complies with USRM specifications is created at the indicated location.

Once you have configured a large number of NSG units, you may export their data to the SDV Session Manager of Cisco (USRM). MCT exports the data into a template XML file that USRM can use. MCT creates for each device such a file, and if virtual devices are configured, a file is also created for each virtual device.

To export NSGs configuration to USRM1. Verify that you have saved the MCT database you wish to export.

2. Select the devices that you wish to export their configuration to the USRM file.

3. Click MCT button.

4. Select Export > Export to USRM.

3.9.4 Exporting Device UptimeYou can export the device uptime to a .CSV Excel file. Device uptime indicates the time the device is up and running since the last reboot. The exported information includes the following parameters:

NSG ETH1 IP

Page 62: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics RF Module Redundancy

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 59 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

NSG Name

NSG SW version

NSG Uptime (Years:Days:Hours:Minutes)

To export NSGs uptime1. Select the devices that you wish to export their uptime.

2. Click MCT button.

3. Select Export > Export Uptime Data to CSV Excel file.

The Action dialog opens.

4. Click on Information to view the location of the CSV file The default path is:C\Program Files\Harmonic\MCT\MCT xx.xx\Data\DB\Uptime Export.

5. To view the CSV file, navigate to it according to the indicated path and double click the CSV file.

3.10 RF Module Redundancy

Action dialog

Click Information

View information

Page 63: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Distributing Alarms Configuration to Multiple NSGs

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 60 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

See 6.6 RF Module Redundancy on page 141.

3.11 Distributing Alarms Configuration to Multiple NSGsDistributing Alarms Settings allows to send the alarm settings of a selected NSG device to other NSG devices.

To distribute alarm settings1. Do either of the following:

To distribute settings to devices of a specific site only, in the Navigation pane, select the required site.

To distribute settings to devices of other sites, in the Navigation pane, select the root node of the sites tree.

2. In Device Information, select the device whose alarm settings you want to distribute to other devices in your system.

The Alarm Settings button is enabled.

3. On the Home tab, in Distribute Files group, click Alarms Settings.

The Distribute Alarms Settings dialog appears. It is populated with NSG devices according to your selecting in the Navigation pane:

4. In the Distribute Alarms dialog, either click Select All to select all populated devices or select the required devices.

5. Click Alarms Settings.

The Action Log dialog appears

6. Wait until Finish is enabled.

3.12 Creating Custom QAM Mapping FileBy default the Emulation Template is set to Normal. However, the following QAM mapping options are available:

Site 1 is selected and the Distribute Alarms dialog is populated with Site 1 devices only.

MCT tree is selected and the Distribute Alarms dialog is populated with the devices of the MCT tree.

Page 64: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Creating Custom QAM Mapping File

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 61 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

NSG 9000 device may emulate the operation of other devices which require a different mapping of the QAMs. To set the required emulation mode, for NSG 9000 version 1.5 and below, see Table 4-14: Operation Mode Parameters for NSG 9000 1.5 & Below on page 84 and for NSG 9000 version 1.5.1 and up, see Table 5-7: VOD Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up on page 117.

NSG 9000-6G device may emulate the operation of other NSG 9000 3GbE devices which require a different mapping of the QAMs. When emulating an NSG 9000 3GbE, NSG 9000-6G routes the UDP range to a QAM. For example UDP 0x501 is routed to QAM=1.2.1, Service ID=1.

NSG 9000-40G device may emulate the operation of other NSG 9000 6GbE devices which require a different mapping of the QAMs. When emulating, NSG 9000-40G routes the UDP range to a QAM. Routing is according to the following two methods:

Normal 10/6 - according to this QAM mapping the 10MSB indicate the designated QAM-RF output and the 6LSB the output service ID. Thus, the allowed ranges are: QAM-RF 0-1023, Service ID 0-63.

Virtualization (8/8 bits) - according to this QAM mapping the 8MSB indicate the designated QAM-RF output and the 8LSB the output service ID. Thus, the allowed ranges are: QAM-RF 0-255, Service ID 0-63.

There are two types of UDP mapping files:

XML file - for NSG 9000-6G and NSG 9000. Each Emulation Mode is defined by an XML file. Once you select an emulation mode, NSG 9000 loads the required emulation mode XML file.

You can customize up to four QAM Mapping modes and export them to an XML file and when required you can import them to the device.

CSV file - for NSG 9000-40G. Each Emulation Mode is defined by a CSV file. Once you select an emulation mode, NSG 9000 loads the required emulation mode file.

You can customize up to four QAM Mapping modes and export them to a CSV file and when required you can import them to the device. You cannot edit the UDP mapping CSV file via MCT.

To define custom QAM mapping file

1. Click MCT button.

2. Click MCT Options.3. In the Navigation pane, select Custom UDP Mapping.

Page 65: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Creating Custom QAM Mapping File

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 62 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

The following screen appears:

4. Applies to XML file only. To edit the XML file, click Edit.

The Save Changes and Cancel Changes buttons are enabled.

5. Edit the XML file to create the required custom mapping document.

6. Click any of the following buttons to obtain any of the listed operations:

Table 3-8: Buttons of Custom UDP Mapping page

Button Explanation

Import L File Allows to import the file. See 3.12.1 Importing Customized QAM Mapping Mode File on page 63.

Export File Allows to export custom QAM Mapping modes. See 3.12.2 Exporting Customized QAM Mapping Mode File on page 63.

View File Allows to view the file, XML - in a browser page, CSV - as an Excel document.

Reset File Allows to return to the default values.

Edit Applies to XML file only. Allows to enter changes in the XML file.

Page 66: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Retrieving Licensing Information

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 63 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3.12.1 Importing Customized QAM Mapping Mode File1. In Custom Mapping page, click Import File.

2. Browse to the required file and click Open.

The imported file appears in the pane.

3. You may apply any of the following actions listed in Table 3-8: Buttons of Custom UDP Mapping page on page 62.

3.12.2 Exporting Customized QAM Mapping Mode File1. In Custom Mapping page, click Export XML File.

2. Browse to the required location.

3. Click Save.

3.13 Retrieving Licensing InformationMCT can retrieve and display licensing records spread across different NSGs at different sites.

To retrieve licensing information, MCT accesses the records of Harmonic’s database and withdraws the information. To query the database, MCT uses the following parameters, depending of the License Manager you are using:

When using License Manger (LM) 2.x:

License pack ID - a number you received when purchasing a license. This number is used for customer authentication. The license pack ID is also called Right ID (RID).

MB serial number - since licenses bound to the specific main board on which they were installed, the serial number of the device is used for retrieving licensing information.

NOTE: Licensing is supported for the following versions:NSG 9000 - all version except version 1.3.9.NSG 9000-6G - all versions.

When using License Manager 3.x and up:

User Name - License Manager username

Password - License Manager password

Save Changes Applies to XML file only. Allows to save the changes to the XML file

Cancel Changes Applies to XML file only. Allows to remove all changes

Table 3-8: Buttons of Custom UDP Mapping page

Button Explanation

Page 67: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Retrieving Licensing Information

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 64 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3.13.1 Understanding the Licensing TabThe Licensing tab allows to query Harmonic’s database for licensing information and to view the retrieved information.

The retrieved information is arranged in the Details section in the following tabs:

The following section instructs you on how to retrieve the licensing information using MCT.

To query for licensing information1. Select the Licensing tab.

Table 3-9: Licensing Related Tabs

Tab Explanation

Platform Includes general information about the device that is used during the query for licensing information.

License Summary

Provides a summary of all the purchased licenses per device. See Table 3-10: License Summary Tab on page 66.

License Details Displays the license packs installed on the device with license type and license serial number. See Table 3-11: License Details Tab on page 67.

License Packs Displays the number of bound licenses per each license pack and license type. See Table 3-12: License Packs Tab on page 68.

QAM&TS Shows the actual active licenses per QAM.

Queries Legacy Authentication, LM 2.x

Device Information section

Details section with Licensing related tabs

Queries New Authentication, LM 3.x

Page 68: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Retrieving Licensing Information

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 65 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

2. In Device Information, select the devices you wish to query for licensing information.

Get License Pack is enabled.

3. For LM version 2.x, do the following:

1. Focus on the Legacy Authentication section.

2. In the Seed License Pack box, enter a license pack ID to authenticate your customer information. When purchasing licenses, you received a license pack ID.

3. Click Get License Packs, to execute a query.

4. In the message that appears, click Yes.

A query is sent to the Harmonic database and the related tabs in the Details section are updated with the queried information. The information relates to all license packs associated with the selected devices.

Each of the following tables describes the license related tabs and their parameters.

5. For LM version 3.x and up, do the following:

1. Focus on the New Authentication section.

2. In User Name, enter your LM username.

Licensing tab is selected

Legacy - enter license pack ID and execute a query

License related tabs that are populated with information following a query

Select devices for querying their licenses

Legacy - enter username and password and execute a query

Enter a license pack ID to allow the query

Click to execute a query

Enter your LM usernameClick to execute a query

Enter your LM username

Page 69: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Retrieving Licensing Information

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 66 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3. Click Get License Packs, to execute a query.

4. In the message that appears, click Yes.

A query is sent to the Harmonic database and the related tabs in the Details section are updated with the queried information. The information relates to all license packs associated with the selected devices.

Each of the following tables describes the license related tabs and their parameters.

3.13.1.1 License Summary Tab

The License Summary tab shows the total number of installed and used licenses per device as the following table explains:

Table 3-10: License Summary Tab

Parameter Explanation

MCT DB The MCT database the device is associated with.

Site Name The site the device is associated with.

Device Name The name of the device.

NSG IP The management IP of the device.

MB Serial Number The serial number of the mother board. Since licenses are bound to the specific main board on which they were installed, licensing queries use this parameter together with the entered license pack to identify the device.

Installed Temp Licenses The number of temporary license - all of the QAM-RF channels are operating. This license is time limited. It can be limited as follows:14 days - default license. See Default QAM Licenses.90 day - usually for trial or demo purposes30 day - usually for trial or demo purposes

Default QAM Licenses Default licenses - 14 days license. Once you purchase the device and as soon as the device starts working it works for 14 days with all of its capabilities. This grace period of 14 days allows you to activate your licenses to guarantee device operation according to its licensed functions.

Installed QAM Licenses Number of installed QAM licenses.

Total Available QAM Licenses

The total amount of available QAM licenses. This number includes the installed and default licenses.

Installed MOTPM Licenses Number of installed Motorola Privacy Mode (MOTPM) licenses. This license type allows to output TSs scrambled in the Privacy Mode encryption technology of Motorola.

Installed DOCDTI Licenses Number of installed DOCSIS DTI (DOCDTI) licenses. This license type allows to output DOCSIS data with DTI synchronization viathe licensed QAM.

Installed DOC Licenses Number of installed DOCSIS (DOC) licenses. This license type allows to output DOCSIS data via the licensed QAM.

Page 70: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Retrieving Licensing Information

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 67 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3.13.1.2 License Details Tab

The License Details tab shows per each device its licenses with the associated license pack, license type and license serial number:

Installed NSCR Licenses Number of installed NSCR licenses. This license type allows to output TSs via the licensed QAM using DVBscrambling.

Used Temp Licenses Number of active temporary licenses.

Used QAM Licenses Number of active QAM licenses.

Used MOTPM Licenses Number of used Motorola Privacy Mode (MOTPM) licenses. This license type allows to output TSs scrambled in the Privacy Mode encryption technology of Motorola.

Used DOC Licenses Number of active DOCSIS licenses. This license type allows to output DOCSIS data via the licensed QAM.

Used DOCDTI Licenses Number of active DOCSIS DTI (DOCDTI) licenses. This license type allows to output DOCSIS data with DTI synchronization viathe licensed QAM.

Used NSCR Licenses Number of active NSCR licenses. This license type allows to output TSs via the licensed QAM using DVBscrambling.

Table 3-11: License Details Tab

Parameter Explanation

MCT DB The MCT database the device is associated with.

Site Name The site the device is associated with.

Device Name The name of the device.

NSG IP The management IP of the device.

License Pack License pack number. N/A - appears for default licenses.

License Type The type of the license: Single QAM License MOT PM per QAM

License Serial Number A unique number to identify the license. If during the query, MCT does not find a license pack associated with a license serial number, a message appears at the end of the query.

Table 3-10: License Summary Tab

Parameter Explanation

Page 71: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Authentication Tab

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 68 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3.13.1.3 License Packs Tab

The License Packs tab shows per each device its licenses with the associated license pack, license type and the number of installed and bound licenses:

NOTE: Only installed licenses have a license pack ID. Temporary and default licenses are not displayed because they do not have a license Pack ID.

3.14 Authentication TabThe Authentication tab is available for NSG 9000-6G devices only. It allows you to enter a username and password for authentication against a RADIUS server. In case you have more than one RADIUS server in your network, or username and password for various groups of NSG devices, use the Authentication tab available for each NSG 9000-6G device.

Once you enter a username and password via the Authentication tab, MCT saves these parameters and uses them to access the devices. You need to enter these parameters whenever you open MCT. MCT does not save the parameters to its database.

NOTE: If you entered authentication details in both Authentication tab of the device and the MCT Ribbon Authentication tab, access is granted according to the details

To use the Authentication tab1. Verify that you are working in the NSG 9000-6G filter.

Table 3-12: License Packs Tab

Parameter Explanation

MCT DB The MCT database the device is associated with

Site Name The site the device is associated with

Device Name The name of the device

NSG IP The management IP of the device

License Pack License pack number. N/A - appears for default licenses.

License Type The type of the license: Single QAM License MOT PM per QAM

Qty Bound The number of installed and bound licenses. To view the number of active licenses, select the QAM&TS tab.In case of a mismatch between the number of active licenses and bound licenses, a message appears.

Page 72: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 3 MCT Basics Authentication Tab

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 69 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

2. Select the Authentication tab.

3. Enter the required Username and Password.

MCT uses this combination to access the devices.

Page 73: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Overview

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 70 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 4Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below)

4.1 OverviewConfigure the devices via the tabs of the Details section. The tabs and their attributes appear as per the version selected as the expected version. The following sections describe the tabs and their attributes according to the most recent available version. If you are using a previous version, some of the documented tabs and/or attributes may not be applicable.

4.2 Setting NSG Platform ParametersDefining the Platform tab parameters is a one time procedure you should do as you start configuring the device via MCT.

To set platform parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the Platform tab.

3. Configure the platform parameters as explained below:

NOTE: The ETH1 IP address always comes up blank and must be configured.

Table 4-1: Platform Parameters

Parameter Explanation

ETH1 IP This address must be unique across the MCT database since it is used for identifying the NSG device. The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG. Should be on a different subnet than ETH2.

MAC Address Read-only. The physical address of the NSG. The required format is 12 digits, hexadecimal with no separator characters.

ETH1 IP Mask The subnet mask for the ETH1 port.

Gateway The IP address of the default gateway in your network (if one exists).

Page 74: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 71 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4.3 Configuring Input Ports4.3.1 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 8108 on page 71

4.3.2 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9116 on page 75

4.3.3 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000 1.5 & Below on page 77

4.3.1 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 8108This configuration includes the following:

Defining the GbE input port and its channels

Defining the ASI input ports

4.3.1.1 Configuring GbE Input Ports in NSG 8108

1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the GbE tab.

ETH1 PHY Configuration

The physical configuration of the physical layer (PHY). You may select either of the following options: Auto Neg - a handshake protocol used in Ethernet links. It

must be selected if the other end of the Ethernet link also uses auto Negotiation. Selecting this protocol while communicating with a device that does not use it, causes communication problems.

100 BT full - sets the speed to 100 BT and communication mode to full duplex.

10 BT full - sets the speed to 10 BT and communication mode to full duplex.

100 BT half - sets the speed to 100 BT and communication mode to half duplex.

10 BT half - sets the speed to 10 BT and communication mode to half duplex.

ETH2 Enable Check to enable the ETH2 port (NSG 8108 and NSG 9000 version 1.5 and below)

ETH2 IP The IP address of the ETH2 port of the NSG, which is used for conditional access.

ETH2 IP Mask The subnet mask for the ETH2 port.

ETH2 PHY Configuration

The physical configuration of the physical layer (PHY). You may select either of the options described in ETH1 PHY Configuration section.

Serial Number Read only. The serial number of the chassis.

Boot Version Read only. The BOOT version currently installed.

Table 4-1: Platform Parameters

Parameter Explanation

Page 75: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 72 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3. Configure the parameters as explained below:

Table 4-2: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 8108

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.

GbE No. Displays the number of the active port.

Port Enable Check the box to enable the port. If you clear the box, the port does not admit input even if the other parameters are configured properly.

IP Address The IP address of the port.

IP Mask The IP mask of the port.

IP Gateway The IP address of the gateway.

Route Refresh If checked, the NSG routinely sends "Ping" requests to the gateway of the GbE port. Requests are sent approximately once per 10 seconds, thus preventing expiration of the route.

Unidirectional Defines the communication type between the GbE port and the switch. Select one of the following:None - the communication with the switch is via the TCP-IP protocol.UDAD - the UDAD (Unidirectional Autodiscovery) is active. The UDAD sends a communication message to the switch via the management LAN. The switch returns its communication via the GbE network. Refer below for UDAD Configuration field information.UDLR - the UDLR (Uni Directional Link Routing Protocol) is active. The UDLR sends a communication message to the switch via the management LAN. The switch returns its communication via the GbE network.

UDAD Login Password The appropriate password that opens the communication between the switch and NSG. The default password is cisco.

UDAD Administrator Password

The password for entering the switch configuration. The default password is cisco.

Force Management IP If checked, the NSG will use specified switch management IP rather than looking for that address in the packet received from the switch.

Switch Management IP The IP address that the NSG uses to communicate with the GbE switch.

Page 76: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 73 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4. To define the GbE channels, click the Channels tab.

5. Define the GbE channels according to the following explanation:

4.3.1.2 Configuring the Input ASI Ports of NSG 8108

1. In Details, select the ASI Input tab.

2. In the ASI page, a row of information appears for each ASI port.

3. Configure the ports as explained below:

Redundancy Mode Select one of the following:Disabled - select this option in case your NSGs have only their GbE-1 channel connected and setup for service. This will eliminate irrelevant alarms originating in the non-active channel.Manual - you should manually select the active channel. In case that the currently active channel fails, you need to switch to the backup channel.Automatic - In case that the currently active channel fails, the NSG will automatically switch to the backup channel, to ensure continuity of service.

Active Port Relevant in case of a GbE port with two channels. If you select Automatic Redundancy, the Active Port control is disabled and NSG controls which channel is active.

Table 4-3: Configuring Channels of GbE Port in NSG 8108

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.

GbE No. (Read Only.) Displays the GbE port of the channel.

Channel No. (Read only.) The number of the GbE port.

Last in Chain This option applies for each GbE channel separately. Check this option, if the relevant channel is last in its chain.In case several NSGs are cascaded, select this option for the last channel on the chain so it does not send traffic back to the GbE switch. Note: Do not select this option for a GbE channel that is not last in chain, or all the NSG devices downstream from it will not be able to receive any data over their GbE ports.

Auto Negotiation Controls (for each GbE channel separately) whether Auto Negotiation is activated. Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol used in GbE links. Check this option if the other end of the GbE link (typically a GbE switch) also uses Auto Negotiation. Otherwise, the box must be cleared. Activating Auto Negotiation while communicating with a device that does not use it causes communication problems.

Table 4-2: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 8108

Parameter Explanation

Page 77: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 74 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4.3.1.3 ASI Input Port NSG 8108 - Configuring Switching Range

Use the Switching tab to direct programs from the input port through which they arrive to a specific output TS. Programs are routed in ranges - each range representing a group of programs that all arrive from the same input port and go to the same output TS.

Switching is irrelevant to GbE input ports. Programs arriving through GbE input ports have their routing information embedded into them.

To configure the switching range1. Select the Switching tab.

2. Configure the parameters according to the following explanation:

Table 4-4: Parameters of ASI Ports of NSG 8108

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP (Read Only) The IP address of the NSG.

ASI In No. (Read Only) The number of the ASI input port.

Port Enable Select to enable the port.

Table 4-5: Switching Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP (Read Only) Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Range No (Read Only) Assigned automatically.

Input Enter the required input port.

From Program Enter the first program ID of the program range.

To Program Enter the last program ID of the program range.

Output 1-8 Check the box that corresponds to the transport stream over which you want to output the indicated range of programs. One input range can leave the NSG on one transport stream only.

Page 78: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 75 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4.3.2 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9116Two rows appear for each NSG 9116. Configure the relevant fields for each GbE port. The following fields and their explanation refer to both Cascading and Switching mode unless else is indicated.

1. In Details, select the GbE tab.

2. Enter the required values according to the following provided information:

Table 4-6: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9116

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.

GbE No. Displays the number of the active port.Switching mode - each GbE port has its own row and both ports are active.

Port Enable Check the box to enable the port. If you clear the box, the port does not admit input even if the other parameters are configured properly.Switching mode - Check the box for each port to enable both ports.

IP Address The IP address of the port.

IP Mask The IP mask of the port.

IP Gateway The IP address of the gateway.

Second IP Address Relevant to NSG 9116 in Cascading and Bitmap UDP scheme. The second IP address of the port is required for the service routing information and belongs to the same subnet as the first IP address. If a service is output via QAM 9 -16, associate the UDP port with the second IP Address to indicate QAM 9 - 16. For example, if you assign the port IP address 10.30.11.133 and 2nd IP address 10.30.11 132, the UDP together with the IP address 10.30.11.133 directs the TS to QAM 1- 8. If you indicate the UDP with the 2nd IP address, the TS is output via QAM 9 - 16.

Route Refresh Cascading mode only. If checked, the NSG routinely sends "Ping" requests to the gateway of the GbE port. Requests are sent approximately once per 10 seconds, thus preventing expiration of the route.

Page 79: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 76 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3. To define the channels of the GbE port, select the Channels tab.

4. Define the GbE channels according to the following explanation:

Unidirectional Defines the communication type between the GbE port and the switch. Select one of the following:None - the communication with the switch is via the TCP-IP protocol.UDAD - the UDAD (Unidirectional Autodiscovery) is active. The UDAD sends a communication message to the switch via the management LAN. The switch returns its communication via the GbE network. Refer below for UDAD Configuration field information.UDLR - the UDLR (Uni Directional Link Routing Protocol) is active. The UDLR sends a communication message to the switch via the management LAN. The switch returns its communication via the GbE network.

UDAD Login Password

Cascading mode only. The appropriate password that opens the communication between the switch and NSG. The default password is cisco.

UDAD Administrator Password

Cascading mode only. The password for entering the switch configuration. The default password is cisco.

Force Management IP

Cascading mode only. If checked, the NSG will use specified switch management IP rather than looking for that address in the packet received from the switch.

Switch Management IP

Cascading mode only. The IP address that the NSG uses to communicate with the GbE switch.

Redundancy Mode Cascading mode only. Select one of the following:Disabled - select this option in case your NSGs have only their GbE-1 channel connected and setup for service. This will eliminate irrelevant alarms originating in the non-active channel.Manual - you should manually select the active channel. In case that the currently active channel fails, you need to switch to the backup channel.Automatic - In case that the currently active channel fails, the NSG will automatically switch to the backup channel, to ensure continuity of service.

Active Port Cascading mode only. Relevant in case of a GbE port with two channels. If you select Automatic Redundancy, the Active Port control is disabled and NSG controls which channel is active.

Table 4-6: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9116

Parameter Explanation

Page 80: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 77 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4.3.3 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000 1.5 & BelowThe NSG 9000 is furnished with three GbE input ports.

To configure the NSG 9000 GbE ports1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the GbE tab.

3. Enter the required values according to the following provided information:

Table 4-7: Configuring Channels of GbE Port in NSG 9116

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.

GbE No. (Read Only.) Displays the GbE port of the channel.

Channel No. (Read only.) The number of the GbE port.

Last in Chain This option applies for each GbE channel separately. Check this option, if the relevant channel is last in its chain.In case several NSGs are cascaded, select this option for the last channel on the chain so it does not send traffic back to the GbE switch. Note: Do not select this option for a GbE channel that is not last in chain, or all the NSG devices downstream from it will not be able to receive any data over their GbE ports.Switching mode - By default, last in chain is selected.

Auto Negotiation Controls (for each GbE channel separately) whether Auto Negotiation is activated. Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol used in GbE links. Check this option if the other end of the GbE link (typically a GbE switch) also uses Auto Negotiation. Otherwise, the box must be cleared. Activating Auto Negotiation while communicating with a device that does not use it causes communication problems

Table 4-8: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9000 1.5 & Below

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.

GbE No. Displays the number of the active port. Switching mode - each GbE port has its own row and both ports are active.

Port Enable Check the box to enable the port. If you clear the box, the port does not admit input even if the other parameters are configured properly.Switching mode - Check the box for each port to enable both ports.

IP Address The IP address of the GbE 1 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected QAM mapping mode.

Page 81: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 78 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4.4 Configuring Operation Mode ParametersThe Operation Mode allows you flexibility and optimal device utilization. It allows you to set general parameters to the output stream.

To define operation mode parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the Operation Mode tab.

3. Define the required parameters as explained below:

NSG 8108 - Table 4-9, “Operation mode parameters of NSG 8108,” on page 79

NSG 9116 - Table 4-10, “Operation Mode Parameters for NSG 9116,” on page 80

IP Mask The IP mask of the port.

IP Gateway The IP address of the gateway.

IP Address 2 The IP address of the GbE 2 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected QAM mapping mode.

IP Address 3 The IP address of the GbE 3 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected QAM mapping mode.

Route Refresh Cascading mode only. If checked, the NSG routinely sends "Ping" requests to the gateway of the GbE port. Requests are sent approximately once per 10 seconds, thus preventing expiration of the route.

Auto Negotiation Controls (for each GbE channel separately) whether Auto Negotiation is activated. Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol used in GbE links. Check this option if the other end of the GbE link (typically a GbE switch) also uses Auto Negotiation. Otherwise, the box must be cleared. Activating Auto Negotiation while communicating with a device that does not use it causes communication problems.

NGOD Input Group Name

Enter the name of the input group according to the D6 standard.

Active Port Select either of the following: SFP - for an optical fiber RJ45 - for a copper cable

Enable Forwarding

Select to allow NSG 9000 to duplicate the incoming content of this GbE port to the GbE port that is defined as a mirroring port in Destination Port.

Destination Port Select the mirroring port. Connect the mirroring port to devices that accept GbE input such as an MPEG analyzer. For cabling instructions, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware guide

Table 4-8: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9000 1.5 & Below

Parameter Explanation

Page 82: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 79 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

NSG 9000 - Table 4-14, “Operation Mode Parameters for NSG 9000 1.5 & Below,” on page 84

Table 4-9: Operation mode parameters of NSG 8108

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Review only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Encryption Mode Select either of the following:DVB Scrambling - standard scrambling methodPM Scrambling - Motorola’s scrambling method

Encoding Mode Defines one of the following QAM encoding modes: Annex-A (DVB) - this mode is used mainly in European

and Asian countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 8 MHz per QAM-RF channel.

Annex-B - this is the mode used in North-American countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel.

Annex-C (Japan) - as implied by its name, used mainly in Japan. Similar to Annex-A in the most part, but utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel.

PID Remapping You may choose either the Paradigm (e.g. set formula) or the Random options to govern the method elementary streams are remapped and transmitted. The chosen option will take affect only after resetting the NSG. See, “4.4.1 PID Remapping Options on page 85.

From PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected. This is the lower limit of the PID range and is written in hexa-decimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0.

To PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected. This is the upper limit of the PID range and is written in hexa-decimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0.

PAT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams.

PMT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams.The allowed range is 66-990ms. The value chosen must be divisible by 66 and if not, the NSG will round up or down to the closest divisible decimal value.

Preclude Broadcast To block management port. The port does not receive broadcast in port level.

Page 83: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 80 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Motorola Pre-encryptionOnly for Privacy Mode

If checked, the NSG handles all incoming content as if it was pre-encrypted using Motorola encryption equipment. All encryption-related information is passed as is to the NSG's output. This handling should not damage non-encrypted content, so you can leave this box checked without ramifications.

Max. Stream per TS The maximum number of elementary streams per transport streams. service per output.

Block TS Oversubscription When enabled the NSG blocks incoming services that surpass the Max. Stream per TS you define.

Max Utilization The maximum number of transport streams possible.

UDP Port Scheme The scheme according to which the UDP Port (a 2-byte number) carries the service routing information See 4.4.2 UDP Port Scheme on page 86.

CAS Enable Enables or disables the encryption option. In order to fully enable this option, you should reboot the NSG device.Note: this parameter is enabled when Encryption Mode is DVB Scrambling. See also Table 3-7, “Get and Send Limitations,” on page 55.

NTP Enabled Select to synchronize the NSG time with the Universal Time Coordination (UTC) by connecting to an NTP (Network Time Protocol) server. If you enable this option,you cannot set the time of the unit manually.

NTP IP Address Enter the IP address of the NTP server

Local Time Offset Select the required local time offset to match between thetime of the device, or UTC time and the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

Disable GbE Alarm - MPEG Sync Loss

You may disable this alarm. The alarm indicates that no valid MPEG data is found in the GbE traffic.

Disable GbE Alarm - No Valid MPEG Stream Input

You may disable this alarm. The alarm indicates that the data received through the GbE port is not a valid MPEG stream. Typically, the GbE stream does not contain a PAT.

Table 4-10: Operation Mode Parameters for NSG 9116

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Review only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Encryption Mode Select either of the following:DVB Scrambling - standard encryption methodPM Scrambling - Motorola’s encryption method

Table 4-9: Operation mode parameters of NSG 8108

Parameter Explanation

Page 84: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 81 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Scrambling Mode Select either of the following scrambling methods: DES DVB

GbE Mode You may choose either the Cascading or the Switching option to govern the traffic between chained NSG 9116 units.Note: changing the GbE Mode applies after sending configuration to device and device reboot. Cascading - an advanced cabling scheme that chains any

number of NSGs together. Each NSG device draws the services intended for it and passes on the traffic so a total one Gigabit is used.

Switching - an advanced cabling scheme that chains two NSG 9116 units to a third NSG 9116 unit. Each of the two units receives another GbE input stream and draws the services intended for it. Each unit passes on the traffic to a different GbE port of the third NSG 9116 unit so a total of one GbE is used.

Note: If Switching is selected, Multicast is disabled. See Table 4-13 on page 84.

QAM Mapping Mode Arranges the QAM channels in relation to RF ports in either of the following options: Normal - For QAM channels mapping, see Table 4-11 on

page 83. 8108 - For QAM channels mapping, see Table 4-12 on

page 83.

Encoding Mode Defines one of the following QAM encoding modes: Annex-A (DVB) - this mode is used mainly in European and

Asian countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 8 MHz per QAM-RF channel.

Annex-B - this is the mode used in North-American countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel.

Annex-C (Japan) - as implied by its name, used mainly in Japan. Similar to Annex-A in the most part, but utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel.

CAS Enabled Enables or disables the encryption option. In order to fully enable this option, you should reboot the NSG device.Note: this parameter is enabled when Encryption Mode is DVB Scrambling. See also Table 3-7: Get and Send Limitations on page 55.

PID Remapping You may choose either the Paradigm (e.g. set formula) or the Random options to govern the method elementary streams are remapped and transmitted. The chosen option will take affect only after resetting the NSG. See, 4.4.1 PID Remapping Options on page 85.

Table 4-10: Operation Mode Parameters for NSG 9116

Parameter Explanation

Page 85: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 82 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

From PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected. This is the lower limit of the PID range and is written in hexa-decimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0.

To PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected. This is the upper limit of the PID range and is written in hexa-decimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0.

PAT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams.

PMT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams. The allowed range is 66-990ms. The value chosen must be divisible by 66 and if not, the NSG will round up or down to the closest divisible decimal value.

Motorola Pre-encryption

If checked, the NSG handles all incoming content as if it was pre-encrypted using Motorola encryption equipment. All encryption-related information is passed as is to the NSG's output. This handling should not damage non-encrypted content, so you can leave this box checked without ramifications.

Max. Stream per TS The maximum number of elementary streams per transport streams.

Block TS Oversubscription

When enabled the NSG blocks incoming services that surpass the Max. Stream per TS you define.

Max Utilization Limit The maximum number of transport streams possible.

UDP Port Scheme The scheme according to which the UDP Port (a 2-byte number) carries the service routing information. See “4.4.2 UDP Port Scheme on page 86.

NTP Enabled Select to synchronize the NSG time with the Universal Time Coordination (UTC) by connecting to an NTP (Network Time Protocol) server. If you enable this option,you cannot set the time of the unit manually.

NTP IP Address Enter the IP address of the NTP server

Local Time Offset Select the required local time offset to match between the time of the device, that is UTC time and the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

Create SAT When enabled an SDT (Service Description Table) is added to the output stream and the Serv. Area parameter (included in the TS page) is sent to the NSG.

Table 4-10: Operation Mode Parameters for NSG 9116

Parameter Explanation

Page 86: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 83 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Disable GbE Alarm - MPEG Sync Loss

You may disable this alarm. The alarm indicates that no valid MPEG data is found in the GbE traffic.

Disable GbE Alarm - No Valid MPEG Stream Input

You may disable this alarm. The alarm indicates that the data received through the GbE port is not a valid MPEG stream.

Table 4-11: Normal - QAM Channel Mapping

RF PortQAM

Channel

1 1,2

2 3,4

3 5,6

4 7,8

5 9,10

6 11,12

7 13,14

8 15,16

Table 4-12: 8108 -QAM Channel Mapping

RF Port QAM Channel

1 1,5

2 2,6

3 3,7

4 4,8

5 1,5

6 2,6

7 3,7

8 4,8

Table 4-10: Operation Mode Parameters for NSG 9116

Parameter Explanation

Page 87: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 84 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Table 4-13: GbE Mode & UDP Port Scheme

GbE Mode & Scheme TS GbE IP Address QAM Output

Switching 1-8 different input 9-16 different input

First Second

1-81-8

Cascading & Bitmap 1-8 same input9-16 same input

First second

1-81-8

Cascading & Encoded 1-16 Enabled port 1-16

Table 4-14: Operation Mode Parameters for NSG 9000 1.5 & Below

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Review only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

QAM Mapping Mode

By default the QAM Mapping Mode is set to Normal. In this case, each RF-QAM port accommodates up to four channel. However, the NSG 9000 device may emulate the operation of other devices which require a different mapping of the QAMs. For detailed information on the QAM Mapping, see the NSG 9000 Software User’s Guide.

Encoding Mode Defines one of the following QAM encoding modes: Annex-A (DVB) - this mode is used mainly in European and

Asian countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 8 MHz per QAM-RF channel.

Annex-B - this is the mode used in North-American countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel.

Annex-C (Japan) - as implied by its name, used mainly in Japan. Similar to Annex-A in the most part, but utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel.

PID Remapping You may choose either the Paradigm (e.g. set formula) or the Random options to govern the method elementary streams are remapped and transmitted. The chosen option will take affect only after resetting the NSG. See, 4.4.1 PID Remapping Options on page 85.

From PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected. This is the lower limit of the PID range and is written in hexa-decimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0.

To PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected. This is the upper limit of the PID range and is written in hexa-decimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0.

PAT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams.

Page 88: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 85 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4.4.1 PID Remapping OptionsSelect either of the following PID remapping options:

PMT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PMT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams. The allowed range is 66-990ms. The value chosen must be divisible by 66 and if not, the NSG will round up or down to the closest divisible decimal value.

DTI Card Exist When selected indicates whether a DTI card is installed in the device. This is a read-only parameter.

Use DTI Clock Check to use the DTI clock. You can select the Use DTI clock parameter only if there is a DTI card, that is, DTI CARD Exist parameter is checked.

NTP Enabled Select this box to synchronize device time with UTC.

NTP IP Address Enter the NTP IP address.

Local Time Offset To set the local time according to the Universal Time Coordination (UTC), select the required time offset.

Encryption Mode Select either of the following:DVB Scrambling - standard scrambling methodPM Scrambling - Motorola’s scrambling method

Application Mode Select either of the following application modes: VOD\SDV - the default option. The NSG 9000 device is

operating as an integral part of a Video On Demand or Switched Digital Video network and the required parameters for this application are enabled.

M-CMTS - The NSG 9000 device is operating as an integral part of an M-CMTS application and its QAMs serve for both VOD narrowcast and DOCSIS.

Symbol Rate 1 The rate of QAM symbols that are encoded and transmitted per second. NSG 9000 has two optional Sym rates, set the required rate for this option.

Symbol Rate 2 The rate of QAM symbols that are encoded and transmitted per second. NSG 9000 has two optional Sym rates, set the required rate for this option.

Interleaver 1 An advanced QAM configuration parameter. For Annex-A or Annex-C, use 12-17. For Annex-B, Interleaver value depends on the constellation in use. NSG 9000 has two optional Interleaver values, set the required value for this interleaver.

Interleaver 2 See Interleaver 1.

Force IGMPv2 Defines the GbE management protocol to IGMPv2 only. NSG 9000 ignores IGMPv3 messages and does not generate IGMPv3 messages.

Table 4-14: Operation Mode Parameters for NSG 9000 1.5 & Below

Parameter Explanation

Page 89: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 86 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Paradigm - a set formula. The elementary streams are selected from a predefined hexa-decimal formula for PMT, Video 1&2, and ECM. For details, see below.

Random - instructs the NSG to remap incoming PIDs to PID numbers that are randomly selected from a predefined range.

When choosing the paradigm option a service ID will be chosen from a predefined hexa-decimal formula and the ID of the PMT, Video, Audio 1&2 and ECM PIDs are derived from the service ID as follows:

NOTE: The Paradigm mode is not suitable for processing services with service IDs greater than 255. If you are using service ID that are greater than 255 you must use the Random mode.

4.4.2 UDP Port SchemeThe scheme according to which the UDP Port (a 2-byte number) carries the service routing information. Select either of the following schemes:

Bitmap- each of the MSB bits represents an Output TS of the NSG. The Output TS is determined by the bit that is set to 1. For example, TS 8 is represented by 10000000, TS 3 by 00000100 and TS 9 by 00000001 together with the 2nd IP address.

The 2nd IP address is relevant in Cascading and Bitmap UDP scheme. The second IP address of the port required for the service routing information. If the service is output via QAM 9-16, associate the UDP port with the second IP address to indicate QAM 9-16.

Encoded - the Output TS is determined by the numeric value of the MSB. For example, TS 8 is represented by 00001000, TS 3 by 00000011 and TS 9 by 00001001.

4.5 Configuring Output ParametersFor detailed explanation, see:

NSG 8108 Table 4-16, “NSG 8108 TS Out Parameters,” on page 87

NSG 9116 Table 4-17, “NSG 9116 TS Out Parameters,” on page 89

NSG 9000 Table 4-18, “NSG 9000 TS Out Parameters 1.5 & Below,” on page 91

Table 4-15: Paradigm Option

Formula Example

Service ID = 0xN Service ID = 0x34

PMT PID = LeftShit (N)=0xNO PMT PID = 0x340

PCR=Video=PMT+1=0x N1 Video = 0x341

Audio 1&2 = PMT+ 4/5=0xN 4, 0xN5 Audio 1&2= 0x344, 0x345

ECM=PMT+9=0xN9 ECM PID=0x349

Page 90: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 87 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4.5.1 Configuring the TS Out in NSG 8108 and 9116For each platform record, MCT creates up to eight (NSG 8108)/ sixteen (NSG 911xx) transport stream rows under the TS tab. Each row corresponds to one transport stream. The streams are automatically numbered 1 through the number of TSs in the TS ID column. Configure the output ports and signals for each stream of the NSG. You must first select a channel bandwidth and then set the other parameters.

To define the out TS parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the TS tab.

3. Define the parameters as explained in the following table.

Table 4-16: NSG 8108 TS Out Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.

QAM Reference Number Each device has 4xRF ports. Each RF port facilitates 2xQAM channels. This field indicates an index number of the QAM channels from 1-8.RF port outputs the QAM channels as follows:RF port 1 outputs QAM reference number 1, 5RF port 2 outputs QAM reference number 2, 6RF port 3 outputs QAM reference number 3, 7RF port 4 outputs QAM reference number 4, 8

Serv. Area Indicates the area this transport stream serves. This value is provided by the vendor and may help you when exporting this database to NMX template. Once you export this database to NMX template, you can monitor the serving area and generate statistical reports.

TS ID The ID number of the Transport Stream ranging from 1->65535. This ID serves in the PAT (Program Allocation Table) of the given TS, to comply with the DVB standard.

EIA Channel The default entry. It indicates the channel number for the RF as defined in the EIA standard. When N/A appears, it indicates that the RF frequency defined in RF Freq does not comply with the frequencies defined by the EIA.

Page 91: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 88 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

RF Freq. (Hz) By default, indicates the RF frequency according to the EIA channel number configured in EIA Freq.However, you can define a required frequency for the RF carrier of this TS, and then N/A appears in EIA Freq. The entered frequency should be divisible by 100. Due to the NSG's dual-upconverter architecture, TSs are actually grouped in pairs as listed in QAM Reference Number. When the RF Frequency of a TS is set to F1, the frequency of its paired TS is automatically set to be (F1-Channel_Bandwidth). For example, if you use Channel Bandwidth of 6Mhz and you set the RF Frequency of TS number 1 to 512,000,000 Hz, then the RF Frequency of TS number 5 will be set to 506,000,000 Hz.

RF Power Level (dbmV) The RF power level in dBmV. When you change the power level of a stream (for example, of stream 1), the power level of its associated stream (for example, stream 5) is automatically updated accordingly. You can specify numbers that contain a decimal digit as well (for example, 50.5).

Constellation Valid values are: Annex-A - QAM16, QAM32, QAM64, QAM128,

QAM256 Annex-B - QAM64, QAM256 Annex-C - QAM16, QAM32, QAM64, QAM128,

QAM256

Symbol Rate (Msps) This is the rate of QAM symbols encoded into the RF signal. Higher symbol rate implies higher rate of delivered data and requires high-quality HFC network infrastructure.

Data Rate (Bps) (Read-Only) The bit rate of the transport stream. The data rate value changes according to the value of Constellation and Symbol Rate parameters.

Interleaver The Interleaver settings determine the robustness of the QAM signal to transmission errors. Recommended values are:ANNEX-A and ANNEX C: 12-17ANNEX-B, Constellation 64: 128-1ANNEX-B, Constellation 256: 128-4 128-1

Spectral Inversion If checked, spectral inversion is enabled

QAM-IF On By default QAM-IF On is selected and the port is open. To close the IF output port of a specific transport stream, clear the box.

Table 4-16: NSG 8108 TS Out Parameters

Parameter Explanation

Page 92: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 89 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

RF On If checked, opens the RF output of a pair of transport streams unless. Clear the box to close the outputs. Transport stream output is enabled only if both the IF and Port Enable boxes are checked.

Table 4-17: NSG 9116 TS Out Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.

QAM Reference Number

The number of QAM channels. Each device has 8xRF ports. Each RF port facilitates 2xQAM channels. This field indicates an index number of the QAM channels from 1-16.RF port outputs the QAM channels as follows:RF port 1 outputs QAM reference number 1, 2RF port 2 outputs QAM reference number 3, 4RF port 3 outputs QAM reference number 5, 6RF port 4 outputs QAM reference number 7, 8RF port 5 outputs QAM reference number 9, 10RF port 6 outputs QAM reference number 11, 12RF port 7 outputs QAM reference number 13, 14RF port 8 outputs QAM reference number 15, 16

GbE IP Indicates The GbE IP address facilitating the data that is output via the QAMs related to this IP address.

Serv. Area Indicates the area this transport stream serves. This value is provided by the vendor and may help you when exporting this database to NMX template. Once you export this database to NMX template, you can monitor the serving area and generate statistical reports.

TS ID The ID number of the Transport Stream ranging from 1->65535. This ID serves in the PAT (Program Allocation Table) of the given TS, to comply with the DVB standard.

EIA Channel The default entry. It indicates the channel number for the RF as defined in the EIA standard. When N/A appears, it indicates that the RF frequency defined in RF Freq does not comply with the frequencies defined by the EIA.

Table 4-16: NSG 8108 TS Out Parameters

Parameter Explanation

Page 93: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 90 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

RF Freq. (Hz) By default, indicates the RF frequency according to the EIA channel number configured in EIA Freq.However, you can define a required frequency for the RF carrier of this TS, and then N/A appears in EIA Freq. The entered frequency should be divisible by 100. Due to the NSG's dual-upconverter architecture, TSs are actually grouped in pairs as listed in QAM Reference Number. When the RF Frequency of a TS is set to F1, the frequency of its paired TS is automatically set to be (F1-Channel_Bandwidth). For example, if you use Channel Bandwidth of 6Mhz and you set the RF Frequency of TS number 1 to 512,000,000 Hz, then the RF Frequency of TS number 2 will be set to 506,000,000 Hz.

RF Power Level (dbmV) The RF power level in dBmV. When you change the power level of a stream (for example, of stream 1), the power level of its associated stream (for example, stream 5) is automatically updated accordingly. You can specify numbers that contain a decimal digit as well (for example, 50.5).

Constellation Valid values are:Annex-A - QAM16, QAM32, QAM64, QAM128, QAM256Annex-B - QAM64, QAM256Annex-C - QAM16, QAM32, QAM64, QAM128, QAM256

Symbol Rate (Msps) This is the rate of QAM symbols encoded into the RF signal. Higher symbol rate implies higher rate of delivered data and requires high-quality HFC network infrastructure.

Data Rate (Bps) (Read-Only) The bit rate of the transport stream.The data rate value changes according to the value of Constellation and Symbol Rate parameters.

Interleaver The Interleaver settings determine the robustness of the QAM signal to transmission errors. Recommended values are:ANNEX-A and ANNEX C: 12-17ANNEX-B, Constellation 64: 128-1ANNEX-B, Constellation 256: 128-4 128-1

Spectral Inversion If checked, spectral inversion is enabled.

QAM-IF On By default QAM-IF On is selected and the port is open. To close the IF output port of a specific transport stream, clear the box.

RF On If checked, opens the RF output of a pair of transport streams. Clear the box to close the outputs. Transport stream output is enabled only if both the IF and Port Enable boxes are checked.

Table 4-17: NSG 9116 TS Out Parameters

Parameter Explanation

Page 94: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 91 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4.5.2 Configuring TS Out in NSG 9000 1.5 & BelowFor each NSG 9000 platform record, MCT creates up to 72 transport stream rows under the TS tab. Each row corresponds to one transport stream. The number of output streams is license dependent. If the RF mode is DUAL only two QAM channels are active and only two streams are outputted once a license is granted.

MCT allocates for each port a maximum of four index numbers for the TS IDs. For example, if only two ports are active in the first slot, the TS IDs are 1, 2 and TS IDs 3 & 4 are reserved for when all four channels of the port are active. In the same way TS IDs 7 & 8 are reserved for when in slot two all four channels of the port are active.

Configure the output ports and signals for each stream of each NSG. You must first select a channel bandwidth and then set the other parameters.

To define the out TS parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the QAM & TS tab.

3. Define the parameters as explained in the following table.

Table 4-18: NSG 9000 TS Out Parameters 1.5 & Below

Field Explanation

NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Slot Number Displays the number of the slots from 1-9. For slots arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware User’s Guide.

Port Number (Read only) Each QAM-RF module has two ports. This field indicates the QAM-RF port number. For QAM-RF port arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware User’s Guide.

QAM Mode The QAM mode defines the number of active QAM channels. Upon changing the amount of active channels, all values of RF parameters turn to their default values. The available options are as follows: SINGLE - only one active QAM channel DUAL - two active QAM channels QUAD - four active QAM channel.

QAM Index Numbers of QAM channels in a sequential order from1-72. (Basically there are up to 72 output TSs). Along this range, select the required QAM channel. The channels are available according to the defined No. of channels. For example, if the No. of Channels is defined as Triple in slot 1 the available QAM channels are 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 and 7. QAM port 4 and 8 are inactive. You cannot change their No. of channels and their frequency is set to 0.

Page 95: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 92 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Serv. Area Indicates the area this transport stream serves. This value is provided by the vendor and may help you when exporting this database to NMX template. Once you export this database to NMX template, you can monitor the serving area and generate statistical reports.

TS ID The ID number of the Transport Stream ranging from 1->65535. This ID serves in the PAT (Program Allocation Table) of the given TS, to comply with the DVB standard.

EIA Channel The default entry. It indicates the channel number for the RF as defined in the EIA standard. When N/A appears, it indicates that the RF frequency defined in RF Freq does not comply with the frequencies defined by the EIA.

RF Freq. (Hz) By default, indicates the RF frequency according to the EIA channel number configured in EIA Freq.You can define another required frequency and then N/A appears in EIA Freq. The entered frequency should be divisible by 100.

RF Power Level The RF power level in dBmV. When you change the power level of a stream (for example, of stream 1), the power level of its associated stream (for example, stream 5) is automatically updated accordingly. You can specify numbers that contain a decimal digit as well (for example, 50.5).

Constellation Valid values are:Annex-A - QAM16, QAM32, QAM64, QAM128, QAM256Annex-B - QAM64, QAM256Annex-C - QAM16, QAM32, QAM64, QAM128, QAM256

Symbol Rate (Msps) This is the rate of QAM symbols encoded into the RF signal. Higher symbol rate implies higher rate of delivered data and requires high-quality HFC network infrastructure.

Interleaver The Interleaver settings determine the robustness of the QAM signal to transmission errors. Recommended values are:ANNEX-A and ANNEX C: 12-17ANNEX-B, Constellation 64: 128-1ANNEX-B, Constellation 256: 128-4 128-1

Spectral Inversion If checked, spectral inversion is enabled

QAM-IF On By default QAM-IF On is selected and the port is open. To close the IF output port of a specific transport stream, clear the box.

Table 4-18: NSG 9000 TS Out Parameters 1.5 & Below

Field Explanation

Page 96: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 93 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

For Network routing configuration, see 4.7 Configuring Network Routing Parameters on page 96.

4.5.3 Multicast (NSG 8108 and 9116)To fully utilize the bandwidth dedicated to Video On Demand, you may configure the NSG to broadcast switch broadcast applications or services other than VOD.

Port Enable If checked, opens the RF output of a pair of transport streams unless it is a module of SINGLE. Clear the box to close the outputs. Transport stream output is enabled only if both the IF and Port Enable boxes are checked.

QAM License Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a QAM license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM license was requested and granted.

PM License Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a PM license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM license was requested and granted.

NSCR License Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a NSCR license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM license was requested and granted.

DOCDTI License Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a DOCDTI license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM license was requested and granted.

DOC License Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a DOC license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM license was requested and granted.

Input Source (Relevant when QAM Mapping Mode is other than Normal.) This filed displays the input port and IP address that is provisioned to this QAM.

NGOD QAM Group Name Enter the QAM group name according to the D6 standard.

DOCSIS Sync Compensation

To fine-tune the sync offset across cable interfaces, use the DOCSIS Sync Compensation option. The sync offset units are ticks of the CMTS 10.24 MHz clock, where1 tick=97.6 nano-sec. The typical allowed offset difference between modems is +/- 6 ticks. To define sync offset value:

1. Measure the average Cable Modem (CM) timing offset difference. You can view the timing offset values via the CMTS console.

2. Define the cable interface to be compensated.

Table 4-18: NSG 9000 TS Out Parameters 1.5 & Below

Field Explanation

Page 97: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 94 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

NOTE: Verify that in Operation Mode > GbE Mode, Cascading is selected.

To define multicast parameters1. In Device Information, select the required NSG device(s).

2. In Details, select the Multicast tab.

On the Home tab, in the Editor group, Add is enabled. The Add button is enabled as long as the Detailed section and the Multicast tab are selected.

3. Click Add.

A record is added.

4. Define the multicast parameters as follows:

NSG 8108 facilitates also two ASI input ports.

For NSG 9116, in Switching mode, two rows of information appear for each GbE port.

4.5.4 Routing a Socket (Sessions) - NSG 9000 1.5 & BelowTo allow an efficient use of the allocated bandwidth and apply the Switched Broadcast technology, use the Session page to multicast incoming services as explained below:

Sessions configured via the MCT are static services. That is, the services have a permanent configuration. The configuration is saved on the NVRAM and once you reboot the device, the configuration of the service is reloaded.

To route a socket1. Verify that the Application Mode is VOD\SDV (Select Operation Mode tab > Application

Mode.

2. Select the Sessions tab.

3. In the Sessions page, define the parameters as explained below:

Table 4-19: Multicast Parameters NSG 8108 and 9116

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP (Read only) The IP address of the device.

Multicast No (Read only) An index number.

Multicast Address Type in the multicast address.

Remapped Service ID Type in the output service ID.

UDP Port Type in the required UDP port.

Outputs Select a QAM to output the service.

Table 4-20: Session Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5 & Below

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Indicates the IP address of the NSG.

Page 98: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Defining NGOD Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 95 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4.6 Defining NGOD ParametersTo allow communication with the ERM, the NSG device supports the D6 and R6 Next Generation On Demand (NGOD) protocols. When communicating using the R6 protocol NSG is always listening on port 554(RTSP).

To configure NGOD and ERM parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select NGOD tab.

3. Define the NGOD and ERM parameters as explained below:

For NSG 9116, see Table 4-21, “NGOD Parameters NSG 9116,” on page 95

For NSG 9000 1.5 & below, see Table 5-17, “NGOD Parameters NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up,” on page 128. (NGOD parameters are the same for the various NSG 9000 versions.)

Session ID Read only. A sequential number to indicate the session ID as it appears in the current page. When working in standalone mode, session ID starts at 10,000 and you can configure up to 100 sessions only. When managing the device via a network management system, you can configure up to 1000 sessions.

Input GbE Port Number Indicates the number of the input port.

Multicast IP\GbE IP Port Enter either a multicast IP address or the IP address of the GbE port selected in Input GbE Port Number.

Input UDP Port Enter the depi-remote-id as appears in CMTS console.

Output QAM Number Enter the QAM-RF channel number (1-72).

Socket Pass Through Select to allow socket output without any changes, that is without remapping and without generating tables. When this option is selected all services in the socket are outputted via the selected output port and the Service ID option is disabled.

Service ID Indicates the service at the output port. When selected new tables are generated at output.

Source IP Indicates the IP address of the broadcasting source.

Table 4-21: NGOD Parameters NSG 9116

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Indicates the IP address of the NSG.

StreamingZone Enter the streaming zone as defined in the D6 protocol.

ComponentName Enter the component name as defined in the D6 protocol.

Table 4-20: Session Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5 & Below

Parameter Explanation

Page 99: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Network Routing Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 96 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4.7 Configuring Network Routing ParametersOnce you add an NSG device, five blank routing records appear in the Routing tab for each GbE port. Define routing records when you need the NSG to communicate with components, such as CAS, that are not included in the NSG's subnet. The Routing tab allows you to define routing records for the ETH2 port of each NSG. You can define up to five routing IP addresses for each NSG.

To configure network route parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the Routing tab.

3. Configure the required parameters as explained below:

4. Click Save.

Bandwidth Update Threshold

Define the allowed deviation from the current output bit rate of the device. Whenever the bit rate deviation reaches the value defined in this field, the NSG sends the ERM the updated output bit rate.

Cost Enter a value as defined in the D6 protocol.

ERM Enable Select to enable the NSG-ERM communication

ERM IP Address Enter the IP address of the ERM.

ERM Port Enter the number of the ERM TCP port

ERM Version Select the supported version of the protocol. NSG supports version 2 which is the default version.

Table 4-22: Network Routing Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Routing No. An index number for each GbE port that is allocated automatically.

Active Select to activate the route. To deactivate the route, de-select the. Once you activate the route, you can set its parameters.

Destination Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the IP address of the destination device.

Mask Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the subnet mask.

Gateway Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway must be in the same subnet as the NSG ETH2 port.

Table 4-21: NGOD Parameters NSG 9116

Parameter Explanation

Page 100: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Configuring SNMP Managers and Community

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 97 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4.8 Configuring SNMP Managers and CommunityAs soon as you add an NSG in the Platform tab, four SNMP manager records appear in the following tabs:

NSG 8108 and 9116 - SNMP Manager tab and SNMP Community tab

NSG 9000 - SNMP tab

4.8.1 Configuring SNMP Parameters for NSG 8108 and 9116 To configure the SNMP traps destination

1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the SNMP Managers SNMP tab.

3. To configure SNMP Traps Destinations, define the parameters as follows:

4. Click Save.

To configure SNMP community1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the SNMP Community tab.

1. Define the parameters as follows:

2. Click Save.

Table 4-23: SNMP Manager tab parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP The IP address of the NSG.

Manager No. A consecutive number of the SNMP Manager. Each NSG has up to four managers.

Active Check to activate the SNMP trap.

Manager IP Address Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the IP address of the computer to forward to SNMP traps.

Table 4-24: SNMP Community

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP The IP address of the NSG.

Get Community The name of the community having read access. It will respond to the Get commands. The default field entry is public.

Set Community The name of the community having write access. It will respond to the Set commands. The default field entry is private.

Trap Community The name of the community to which traps are sent. The default field entry is public.

Page 101: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Generating Access Control List (ACL)

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 98 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4.8.2 Configuring SNMP - NSG 9000 1.5 & Below1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the SNMP tab.

3. Define the parameters as follows:

NOTE: You can define up to four hosts.

4.9 Generating Access Control List (ACL)To control the access of other network devices to the NSG 9000 device, you can create either of the following lists of network devices:

Network devices with permission to communicate with the EdgeQAM

Network devices that are prohibited from communicating with the EdgeQAM.

To generate ACL1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the Operation Mode tab.

3. Select Enable ACL.

4. Select the required ACL Mode:

Exclude - To create a list of network devices that are prohibited from communicating with the device.

Include - To create a list of network devices that are allowed to communicate with the device.

Table 4-25: SNMP Tab for NSG 9000 1.5 & Below

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP The IP address of the NSG.

Get Community The name of the community having read access. It will respond to the Get commands. The default field entry is public.

Set Community The name of the community having write access. It will respond to the Set commands. The default field entry is private.

Trap Community The name of the community to which traps are sent. The default field entry is public.

Host 1 IP Address Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG.

Host 1 Version Open the Version list and select the required SNMP version.

Enable Host 1 Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG.

Page 102: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Generating Access Control List (ACL)

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 99 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

5. Select the Access Control List tab.

The Add button is enabled.

6. Click Add to add a blank row.

7. Configure the parameters as explained below:

Table 4-26: ACL Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Address The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.

Enable ACL Read only. ACL feature is enabled once you enabled it in the Operation Mode tab.

ACL Mode Read only. Configuration is as defined via the Operation Mode tab. Exclude - To create a list of network devices that are prohibited

from communicating with the device. Include - To create a list of network devices that are allowed to

communicate with the device.

Index Read only. A sequential number of the devices listed in the excluded/included list.

IP Address Enter the IP address of the source device, that is the device to communicate or to be banned from communicating with the device.

IP Mask Enter the required IP mask. You can allow/block a group of network devices to communicate with the device.

Page 103: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS)

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 100 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4.10 Conditional Access System (CAS) The Conditional Access System (CAS) prevents unauthorized viewing of programs by scrambling services that later on can be decrypted using the correct decrypting key.

NSG devices support the following CAS modes:

DVB CAS - An encryption mode for the DVB protocol.

Privacy Mode - An encryption mode developed by Motorola Inc.

This section guides you on how to define the CAS parameters via MCT for both CAS systems.

4.10.1 Configuring DVB CAS DVB-CAS is applied in the following two options:

Tier-based encryption - all VOD sessions are encrypted using a single ECM.

Session-based encryption - every VOD session is encrypted using a dedicated control word, and requires its own ECM.

All NSG models support both DVB-CAS options. Some of the DVB-CAS configuration parameters apply to both modes, while other parameters are relevant only to one of the modes.

4.10.1.1 Configuring the EIS Parameters

To encrypt services, NSG needs to communicate with an external EIS (Event Information Scheduler) that typically is part of the video server. Through the EIS page you set the basic operation and communication parameters for EIS.

NOTE: When the CAS Enabled option is disabled all changes to CAS parameters are not sent to the device.

To set EIS attributes1. Select the DVB-CAS tab.

2. Configure the parameters as explained below:

NSG 8108 and 9116 - Table 4-27, “EIS Parameters (NSG 8108 & 9116),” on page 100

NSG 9000 - Table 4-28, “EIS Parameters (NSG 9000 1.5 & Below),” on page 101

Table 4-27: EIS Parameters (NSG 8108 & 9116)

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP (Read only) Indicates the IP address of the NSG.

Static AC When selected, all services are scrambled with the same control word and ECM PID.

EIS Port The TCP port through which NSG communicates with the EIS. Valid values range between 0-65535.

CP Duration (sec). The Crypto Period (in seconds). The NSG changes the control word (or "key") for encrypted services every X seconds, as indicated here. Valid values range between 5-7200.

Page 104: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS)

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 101 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

The following table lists the EIS Parameters. It includes the following parameter types:

parameters that are relevant to both modes - no specific indication in the table

parameters that are relevant only for tier-based - specific indication in the table

parameters that are relevant only for session-based - specific indication in the table

CA Desc Allows you to select a location in the PMT for the CA descriptor. The CA descriptor may appear either in a service or elementary level or in both levels.

Clear Time on AC Change The clear time in seconds due to the change of Access Criteria. This field indicates the allowed period of time without any active access criteria. Valid values range between 0-9999. The default value is 20 seconds.

ECM PID If Static AC is checked, enter the ECM PID for scrambling with it all the services.

Super CAS ID (Hex) If Static AC is checked, enter the Super CAD ID of the ECMG as provided by the vendor.

Access Criteria If Static AC is checked, enter access criteria as provided by the vendor.

TS ID Provisioning Indicates the provisioned output in either of the following options: Direct - The provisioned TS ID is the same as the

output TS ID. By Output Number - The default option. Indicates the

provisioned output according to the QAM number that is a number between 1-8. Numbers higher than 8 are read according to the 1-8 sequence. For example, the number 9 means output 1 and number 16 means output 8.

Table 4-28: EIS Parameters (NSG 9000 1.5 & Below)

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP (Read only) Indicates the IP address of the NSG.

CAS Enabled Select this box to enable the CAS to allow the service to be encrypted. If you change CAS parameters and the CAS is disabled, changes are not sent to the device.

EIS>SCS Port Number Enabled when in Session based mode. Defines the TCP port through which NSG communicates with the EIS. Valid values range between 1-65535.

Table 4-27: EIS Parameters (NSG 8108 & 9116)

Parameter Explanation

Page 105: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS)

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 102 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

CP Duration (sec). The Crypto Period (in seconds). The NSG changes the control word (or "key") for encrypted services every X seconds, as indicated here. Valid values range between 5-7200.

CA Desc Allows you to select a location in the PMT for the CA descriptor. The CA descriptor may appear either in a service or elementary level or in both levels.

Clear to Scramble (sec) The clear time in seconds before starting to scramble the service once the SCG is received. Valid values range between 0-7200. The default value is 0 seconds.

Tier based The default DVB scrambling mode is Session based. To change it to Tier based, select this box. When selected all services are scrambled with the same control word and ECM and there is no external EIS. Once selected, the DVB Tier Based parameters are enabled:

ECM PID If Tier-based is checked, enter the ECM PID for scrambling with it all the services.

SuperCAS ID If Tier-based is checked, enter the SuperCADS ID of the ECMG as provided by the vendor.

Access Criteria Enter access criteria as provided by the vendor.

TS ID Provisioning Indicates the provisioned output in either of the following options: Direct - The provisioned TS ID is the same as the

output TS ID. By Output Number - The default option. Indicates the

provisioned output according to the QAM number that is a number between 1-72.

Note: This parameter is relevant when working in Sessions based.

Block Upon Failure If Tier based is checked, this parameter is enabled. Check this parameter to allow the device to block the stream to protect the content. When a stream is blocked, no picture appears on the end user screen. This action takes place in case the NSG 9000 could not establish communication with the ECMG.

Fail to Scramble Timeout (Sec)

If Tier based is selected, define the period of time between outputting the service and activating the Block Upon Failure feature.

ECMG Failure Retries Define the number of times the NSG 9000 unit tries to establish communication with the Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG) before issuing the alarm ECMG Connection Failure.

Table 4-28: EIS Parameters (NSG 9000 1.5 & Below)

Parameter Explanation

Page 106: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS)

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 103 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4.10.1.2 Defining the ECMG Parameters

ECMG (Entitlement Control Message Generator) parameters specify communication between the ECM generator and the NSG. Each row in the page represents an ECMG. You can define up to five ten ECMGs.

If multiple ECMGs are available, the NSG tries to connect to one of them starting from the first ECMG defined in this page. If the connection fails, the NSG tries to connect to the next defined ECMG. After connecting to an ECMG, the status of the subsequent devices on the list remains Disconnected. If the NSG fails to connect to all ECMGs, the system issues the ECMG connection failure alarm.

To set ECMG attributes1. Select the ECMG tab.

2. Configure the parameters as explained in the following table:

4.10.2 Privacy ModePrivacy Mode allows NSG to encrypt the Video-on-Demand content that is flowing through it. In PM-enabled systems, NSG devices are grouped into VODS (Video On Demand System.) Each VODS is accessed by a specific VODS ID and password defined in the Privacy Mode tab.

Table 4-29: ECMG Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Indicates the IP of the device.

ECMG No. An index number that indicates the sequential number of the ECMG. The NSG tries to connect to the ECMGs according to their order.

Active Check to activate the ECMG. Once you check it you can define the ECMG parameters.

Name Enter the brand name of the ECMG.

Super CAS ID A 32-bit hexadecimal number that consists of the 16-bit CA vendor ID and an additional 16-bit number that distinguishes one ECM generator from another for the same CAS vendor. The super CAS ID determines which access criteria is coupled with each ECMG. The CAS vendor provides this value.

Protocol Revision Specifies the CAS mode of operation. Select Revision 1 or 2 for SimulCrypt Ver. 1 or 2 respectively.

IP Address The IP address of the ECMG. The CAS vendor provides this value.

Port The number (in decimal format) of the TCP port used to connect the ECMG. The CAS vendor provides this value.

Channel ID A unique numeric value that identifies an NSG specific to the ECMG.

Page 107: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS)

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 104 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Each VODS is assigned with its own unique ECMs which are generated randomly by the ERS. The ERS sends the MCT application a time indication for checking whether the ECM was changed (callback) and an ERS Synch Number to notify of a possible change of ECM. The MCT application checks at each indicated callback time whether the Sync Number has changed and once a change is detected the MCT application updates all NSGs of the VODS.

To allow an accurate ECM update, set the MCT computer time according to either of the following:

NTP server - install NTP client on MCT computer. The NTP client is not provided by Harmonic Inc.

Local network time service - consult your IT personnel.

NOTE: Prior to configuring the PM parameters, verify that CAS is enabled.

4.10.3 Configuring PM Global Parameters

To effectively utilize the Privacy Mode, you must ensure that it is configured according to your specific requirements. Use the Privacy Mode tab to set Privacy Mode global parameters.

4.10.3.1 Managing the ECMs

The ECMs are updated either automatically or manually. You can also remove all ECMs from the selected NSGs.

Table 4-30: Privacy Mode Terminology

Term Explanation

Callback A UTC time indication at which the MCT application is requested to connect with the ERS to check whether the ERS Synch Number has changed. A change in this number indicates the generation of a new ECM.

ERS Encryption Renewal Server the MCT connects to.

ERS Synch Number When the ERS Synch Number changes, a new ECM is generated. All NSGs of the VODS should be updated with the new ECM.

VOD Video On Demand System.

Page 108: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS)

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 105 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Automatically - The MCT application automatically connects to the ERS according to the last callback and checks whether the ERS Synch Number was changed. Once it was changed, the MCT sends the new ECM to the NSGs of the relevant VODS. If it fails to communicate with an NSG, it attempts to connect to it every whole hour and to update the ECM. In addition, upon a restart of the MCT computer, the MCT automatically checks for changes of the callback and ERS Synch Number and updates the NSGs as required.

Manually - Once you click Update ECM, the MCT application connects to the ERS and if the ERS Synch Number was changed the MCT sends the new ECM to the NSGs of the relevant VODS.

Purge ECMs - allows to remove all ECMs from the selected NSGs.

To enable automatic ECM update1. On Privacy Mode tab, in Options group select Auto ECM Update option.

The MCT application automatically connects to the ERS according to the last callback and checks whether the ERS Synch Number was changed.

To update the ECM manually

In case Automatic ECM Update is not checked and you wish to update the ECM, do the following:

1. Select the NSGs you want to update their ECMs.

2. On Privacy Mode tab, in ECM group, click Update ECM.

The Action Log dialog appears

3. Wait until Finish is enabled.

To purge ECMs 1. Select the NSGs you want to update their ECMs.

2. On Privacy Mode tab, in ECM group, click Purge ECM.

The Action Log dialog appears

3. Wait until Finish is enabled and all ECMs are removed from the selected NSGs.

4.10.3.2 Defining ERS General Parameters

Define ERS general parameters via Privacy Mode tab, Options group:

To define ERS parameters1. Verify that ERS Type is defined as Production. The default type is Production and the

Development type is for debug purposes only.

2. To define the type of ECM request that is sent to the ERS, open the Cipher Type list and select either of the following options:

Select to allow auto ECM update

Page 109: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS)

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 106 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

DES - a request to generate an ECM that matches the DES scrambling method, usually used in north America.

DVB - a request to generate an ECM that matches DVB and its scrambling method, usually used in Europe.

4.10.3.3 Defining ERS Communication Parameters

Define the ERS communication parameters via Privacy Mode tab, ERS Communication group.

1. To define the callback, enter in ERS Query Interval the required time indication in milliseconds. The default value is 10000msec.

2. To define the timeout upon an HTTPS request, enter in ERS HTTPS Request Timeout the required time indication in milliseconds. The default value is 30000msec.

3. To check the ERS status, copy into your browser the ERS URL indicated in ERS Server URL and view the ERS status.

4.10.3.4 Managing the VODS

Manage your VODS via Privacy Mode tab, VODS group:

To select VODS Open the ID list and select the required VODS.

4.10.3.5 Adding/Removing VODS

NSGs may belong to different VODS who are defined by a unique ID and password. To identify each VODS, enter a unique VODS ID and password.

To add VODS1. Click Add.

The ADD VODS dialog appears:

2. Enter the VODS ID and password.

Page 110: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS)

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 107 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3. To complete this procedure, you should validate the VODS ID and password. To validate, click Verify.

You are asked to wait while the ERS checks the VODS ID and password.

If the VODS details are invalid, an error message appears. You should retry to add the VODS.

If the VODS details are validated, the following message appears:

4. In the Add VODS dialog, click Add to add the VODS to the VODS list. VODS are listed with either of the following:

Green check mark - indicates that the VODS details are verified by the ERS.

Red X - indicates that the VODS details are invalid and the ERS did not approve the ID and password.

.

To remove VODS1. Open the ID list and select the required VODS to be removed.

2. Click Remove.

The required VODS is removed from the ID list.

VODS details are approved by the ERS

VODS details are not approved by the ERS

Page 111: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS)

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 108 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4.10.3.6 Changing VODS Password

1. Click Change Password.

2. Enter the new password.

3. Click OK.

4.10.3.7 Testing VODS ERS Communication

1. Open the ID list and select the required VODS.

2. Click Test.

A message appears notifying whether the VODS selected in the ID list communicated with the ERS, and of the callback name and ERS Sync.

3. Click Ok.

4.10.3.8 Monitoring Privacy Mode Operation of a Specific VODS

1. Open the ID list and select the required VODS.

2. To view the log, click View Log.

3. To remove all previous records from log, click Clear Log.

4.10.4 Configuring Privacy Mode Parameters per NSG

4.10.4.1 Defining Privacy Mode Parameters

1. Select the Privacy Mode tab.

2. Configure the parameters as explained in the following table:

Table 4-31: Privacy Mode Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.

Enable Select to enable encryption.

Clear To Scramble Transition (sec) Enter the clear time in seconds before starting to scramble the service, once an ECM is received. Valid values range between 0-60. The default value is 3 seconds.

VODS ID The unique ID of the VODS the NSG belongs to.

Page 112: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & 9000-3G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS)

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 109 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Warning - ECM Expiration Date (days) The NSG issues a warning if the number of days that have passed since the expiration of the current callback is larger than the value indicated in this field.

Alarm - ECM Expiration Date (days) The NSG issues an alarm if the number of days that have passed since the expiration of the current callback is larger than the value indicated in this field.

ERS Synch Number View only. The current ERS Synch Number. When this number changes, a new ECM is generated.

ECM Next Callback Date The next time the MCT application needs to check whether a new ECM was generated.

Last ECM Update Date The last time the NSG was updated with a new ECM or callback.

Stream Processing on ECM Expiration Open the Stream Processing on ECM Expiration list and select either of the following: Scramble with Last ECM - All NSGs of the

VODS should be updated with the new ECM.

Don’t Scramble - do not scramble the stream.

Table 4-31: Privacy Mode Parameters

Parameter Explanation

Page 113: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Overview

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 110 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 5Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up

5.1 OverviewNOTE: The configuration of NSG 9000 devices running with firmware version 1.5 and up is described in a separate chapter because version 1.5 consists of different configuration logic. and incorporated major changes.

Configure the devices via the tabs of the Details section. The tabs and their attributes appear as per the version selected as the expected version. The following sections describe the tabs and their attributes according to the most recent available version.

5.2 Setting NSG Platform ParametersDefining the Platform tab parameters is a one time procedure you should do as you start configuring the device via MCT.

To set platform parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Device Details, select the Platform tab.

3. Define the parameters as explained below:

Table 5-1: Platform Parameters NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up

Parameter Explanation

ETH1 Read only. Displays the IP address of the currently configured Eth1 port.

Boot Version The BOOT flash version of the device.

MB FPGA Version The version of the FPGA firmware loaded onto the main board.

MB Serial Number The serial number of the main board

Chassis Serial Number The serial number of the chassis.

Force IGMPv2 To set the GbE management to support the IGMPv2 protocol only, select Force IGMP V2. NSG 9000 ignores any IGMPv3 messages and does not generate any IGMPv3 messages.

DTI Card Exist Read only. Indicates whether a DTI card is mounted. This field is updated after performing Get From Device.

Use DTI Clock Select to enslave NSG 9000 clock to the DTI clock.

Page 114: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Management Port

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 111 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

5.3 Configuring Management PortThe IP address of the ETH ports or NSG 9000 primary IP address is configured as part of the NSG 9000 installation. However, when required, you may change the IP address settings.

NOTE: Configure the IP address of ETH1 on a different subnet than that of ETH2. Configuring both ports to be on the same subnet may result in serious network communication problems. NSG 9000 uses the ETH1 port to communicate with the network for management purposes and ETH2 for Conditional Access Systems (CAS) purposes.

To change configuration of ETH1 1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Device Details, select the Management tab.

3. Define the parameters as explained below:

DTI Redundancy Mode To set the DTI port redundancy mode, open the Redundancy Mode list and select one of the following: Manual - you need to select the DTI port. No

automatic switching/activation of ports is done, regardless of the status of the DTI ports.

Automatic (no Auto Revert) - selecting the active port is completely automatic, without any intervention and without any preference of a specific port. If the active port fails, the standby port is activated and assumes the role of "active" as long as it is in normal state. If the latter fails, ports will be switched again. This switching can continue any number of times, without any preference of a specific port.

Automatic (Auto Revert) - in this mode, the selected port (as defined in Selected Port) is always preferred over the other port. In case that the selected port fails, the standby port is automatically activated. Once the selected port is fixed, the NSG automatically switches back to the selected port.

DTI Selected Port To select the active DTI port, open the Selected Port list and select either port 1 or 2.The Selected Port list is disabled if Automatic (no Auto Revert) is selected.

Table 5-2: Eth1 Parameters NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of the currently configured Eth1 port.

Eth1 IP Enter a new IP address for Eth1. Once you send it to the device the NSG IP field is updated accordingly.

Table 5-1: Platform Parameters NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up

Parameter Explanation

Page 115: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Management Port

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 112 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

5.3.1 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000 1.5.x & UpThe NSG 9000 is furnished with three GbE input ports.

To configure the NSG 9000 GbE ports1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the GbE tab.

MAC Address Read only. View the MAC address of the device.

Eth1 Mask Enter the Mask address of the Eth1 port

Gateway Enter the IP address of Eth1 gateway

Eth1 PHY Configuration To define the physical layers of the Ethernet communication, open the Ethernet list and select one of the following: Auto Neg - The Auto Negotiation is a handshake

protocol used in GbE links. Select this check box to activate the Auto Negotiation protocol only if the other end of the GbE link also uses auto negotiation.

100 BT full - sets the speed to 100 BT and communication mode to full duplex.

10 BT full - sets the speed to 10 BT and communication mode to full duplex.

100 BT half - sets the speed to 100 BT and communication mode to half duplex.

10 BT half - sets the speed to 10 BT and communication mode to half duplex.

Enable Eth2 Click to enable Eth2

Eth2 IP Enter Eth2 IP address

Eth2 IP Mask Enter Eth2 Mask address

Eth2 PHY Configuration Open the list and define the physical layer of the Eth 2 communication as explained in Eth1 PHY.

Enable ACL Click to enable Access Control List (ACL). To control the access of other network devices to the NSG 9000 device, create either of the following lists of network devices: Network devices with permission to communicate with

the EdgeQAM Network devices that are prohibited from

communicating with the EdgeQAM. See, 5.15 Generating Access Control List (ACL) on page 131.

ACL Mode Select either of the following: Exclude - To create a list of network devices that are

prohibited from communicating with the device. Include - To create a list of network devices that are

allowed to communicate with the device.

Table 5-2: Eth1 Parameters NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up

Parameter Explanation

Page 116: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Management Port

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 113 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3. Enter the required values according to the following provided information:

Table 5-3: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.

GbE No. Displays the number of the active port. Switching mode - each GbE port has its own row and both ports are active.

Port Enable Check the box to enable the port. If you clear the box, the port does not admit input even if the other parameters are configured properly.Switching mode - Check the box for each port to enable both ports.

IP Address The IP address of the GbE 1 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected QAM mapping mode.

IP Mask The IP mask of the port.

IP Gateway The IP address of the gateway.

IP Address 2 The IP address of the GbE 2 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected QAM mapping mode.

IP Address 3 The IP address of the GbE 3 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected QAM mapping mode.

Route Refresh If checked, the NSG routinely sends "Ping" requests to the gateway of the GbE port. Requests are sent approximately once per 10 seconds, thus preventing expiration of the route.

Auto Negotiation Controls (for each GbE channel separately) whether Auto Negotiation is activated. Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol used in GbE links. Check this option if the other end of the GbE link (typically a GbE switch) also uses Auto Negotiation. Otherwise, the box must be cleared. Activating Auto Negotiation while communicating with a device that does not use it causes communication problems.

NGOD Input Group Name

Enter the name of the input group according to the D6 standard.

Active Port Select either of the following: SFP - for an optical fiber RJ45 - for a copper cable

Port Redundancy Applies to NSG 9000-3G version 1.6 and up. This version supports 1:1 port redundancy. For each input GbE port with fiber/copper SFP, you can define a backup port with copper RJ-45 connector. The backup port backs up one primary port only.To enable port redundancy, select the required port. The parameters of the backup port are disabled.You can enable port redundancy only if the port is enabled. You can disable a port only if port redundancy is disabled.

Page 117: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Management Port

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 114 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

5.3.2 RF Module TabOnce you read information from the device, the RF Module tab updates to display information about each slot and the installed module. Thus, some of the parameters of the RF Module tab are read only. You can also define global RF module parameters.

To view and configure RF module parameters1. Read information from the device (Select the device and click Get from Device.)

2. Select the RF Module tab.

3. View/configure the following information:

Enable Forwarding

Select to allow NSG 9000 to duplicate the incoming content of this GbE port to the GbE port that is defined as a mirroring port in Destination Port.

Destination Port Select the mirroring port. Connect the mirroring port to devices that accept GbE input such as an MPEG analyzer. For cabling instructions, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware guide

Table 5-4: RF Module tab - NSG 1.5.x & Up

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Slot No. Displays the slot in of the RF module, usually a number between 1- 9.

Actual Card Indicates the actual module type. See Table 5-5: Module Type on page 115.

Expected Card Indicates the configured module type. See Table 5-5: Module Type on page 115.

Annex Select the required ITU-T Annex: Annex-A (DVB) - this mode is used mainly in European

and Asian countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 8 MHz per QAM-RF channel.

Annex-B - this is the mode used in North-American countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel.

Annex-C (Japan) as implied by its name, used mainly in Japan. Similar to Annex-A in the most part, but utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel.

Table 5-3: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up

Parameter Explanation

Page 118: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Management Port

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 115 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

5.3.2.1 QAM Placement

NOTE: Relevant to QAM-RF module NSG-8R1G only.

The QAM Placement feature allows you to configure the QAM-RF channels as follows:

Block - standard placement of adjacent QAM-RFs, depending on the selected ITU-T Annex.

Constellation To define the required constellation, open the Constellation list. The Constellation is the type of Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) used. QAM constellation affects Data Rate and Symbol Rate, and must be set according to HFC network properties. Valid values are:Annex-A or Annex-C 16, 32, 64, 128, 256Annex-B 64 and 256

Symbol Rate Define/view the rate of QAM symbols that are encoded and transmitted per second. You can define the symbol rate in Annex A and C. In Annex B, you can only view its value.

Interleaver 1 View the interleaver values as defined in the QAM tab. NSG 9000 has two optional Interleaver values, set the required value for this interleaver.

Interleaver 2 See Interleaver 1.

QAM Placement Relevant to QAM OCTAL only. See 5.3.2.1 QAM Placement on page 115.

RF Template Select the required EIA type: EIS-STD - frequency is defined using channel numbers

based on the EIA-STD channel table. See EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps on page 208.

EIA-HRC - RF settings are entered using channel numbers based on the EIA-HRC channel table. See EIA SDT and HRC Standards on page 117.

Table 5-5: Module Type

Module Type Explanation

NSG-2R QUAD, up to four QAM-RF channels per RF port

NSG-2R1G QUAD, up to four QAM-RF channels per RF port. Channels frequency is between 53-999MHz.

NSG-8R1G OCTAL, up to eight QAM-RF channels per RF port. Currently only four QAM-RF channels are supported.

Table 5-4: RF Module tab - NSG 1.5.x & Up

Parameter Explanation

Page 119: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Redundancy Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 116 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Per QAM - you can place each individual QAM anywhere within the 48Mhz block as long as the following conditions are met:

QAM placement prevents out-of-block configurations. QAM placement should not surpass the 48Mhz block.

The order of the frequencies is from lowest to highest.

No overlapping frequencies (according to the symbol rate). The bandwidth range of each signal does not overlap the bandwidth range of its adjacent signal.

The QAMs frequency steps of RF port 1 and RF port 2 are identical. If QAM frequencies of RF port 1 are as follows: 500, 506, 515Mhz, offset of +6 and +15 from the lowest, then the frequencies of RF port 2 should be, for example, as follows: 600, 606, 615.

Switching from Block to Per QAM Verify that the number of QAM-RF channels is identical in both ports.

When changing from Block to Per QAM, the previously defined frequencies appear and you can change them as required.

When changing from Per QAM to Block, the default frequencies appear according to the defined ITU-T Annex.

5.4 Configuring Redundancy ParametersNSG 9000 supports edge cluster technology. This technology offers high availability obtained by 1:1 device redundancy. The active and standby devices are configured the same and are provisioned with the same sessions. However, the output ports of the standby device are disabled. Both the active and standby device communicate with each other via their Eth1 and Eth2 ports. See NSG 9000 Software User’s Guide.

To configure edge cluster parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. Select the Edge Cluster tab.

3. Configure the edge cluster parameters as explained below:

5.5 Configuring VOD ParametersConfigure VOD parameters when the NSG 9000 device serves as a highly integrated digital video gateway, capable of multiplexing on-demand content streamed over an IP network.

To configure VOD parameters

Table 5-6: Redundancy Parameters

Parameter Explanation

Eth1 IP Read only. The IP address of the Eth1 port.

Device Redundancy Mode

Select one of the following modes: Mute - all of the QAM-RF channels are mute Edge Cluster - the device operates in a redundancy mode StandAlone - the device operates in a stand alone mode

Eth1 Peer IP Enter the IP address of the Eth1 port of the peer device

Eth2 Peer IP Enter the IP address of the Eth2 port of the peer device

Page 120: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring VOD Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 117 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

1. In device Information, select the required device

2. In Details, select the VOD tab.

3. Configure the parameters as explained below:

Table 5-7: VOD Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Encryption Mode Select either of the following:DVB Scrambling - standard scrambling methodPM Scrambling - Motorola’s scrambling method

Emulation Template The Emulation Template, previously known as QAM Mapping Mode is set by default to Normal. In this case, each RF-QAM port accommodates up to four channel. However, the NSG 9000 device may emulate the operation of other devices which require a different mapping of the QAMs. For detailed information on the QAM Mapping, see the NSG 9000 Software User’s Guide.

PID Remapping You may choose either the Paradigm (e.g. set formula) or the Random options to govern the method elementary streams are remapped and transmitted. The chosen option will take affect only after resetting the NSG. See, 4.4.1 PID Remapping Options on page 85.

From PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected. This is the lower limit of the PID range and is written in hexa-decimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0.

To PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected. This is the upper limit of the PID range and is written in hexa-decimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0.

PAT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams.

PMT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams. The allowed range is 66-990ms. The value chosen must be divisible by 66 and if not, the NSG will round up or down to the closest divisible decimal value.

Update PMT Version Select Update PMT Version to update the PMT version. This version is incremented every time the PMT’s data is changed (e.g. the Video PID changes).

Page 121: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring SDV Redundancy Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 118 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

5.6 Configuring SDV Redundancy Parameters

5.6.1 RedundancyNSG 9000 supports service redundancy that is activated once the device does not detect the service at the input port. Service redundancy is supported in either of the following methods:

Hot - NSG 9000 JOINs both the primary multicast group and the backup multicast group. Both primary and backup services are at the input to allow short fail-over time.

Warm - NSG 9000 JOINS the primary multicast group only. Once the device does not detect the service at the input, it JOINs the backup multicast group and the fail-over time is longer.

To define SDV redundancy parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the SDV tab.

3. Configure the following parameters:

Create SAT Select Create SAT (Service Area Table), to create SAT at the output.Once Create SAT is selected, the following parameters are enabled: Original Network ID Serving Area Location in SAT To create SAT, serving area should be up to16bits or up to 65535. See Table 5-11 on page 120.

Original Network ID (Hex) If Create SAT is selected, define the original network ID.

Serving Area Location in SAT

If Create SAT is selected, open the Serving Area Location in SAT list and select one of the following: TS ID - the serving area is written to the TS ID. First Service Name - the serving area is written to the

first service name Both - the serving area is written to both the TS ID and

the first service name.

Auto Detection Check to allow auto detected VOD sessions.

Session Inactivity Teardown Threshold (sec)

Enter the allowed duration, in seconds, for session inactivity before the session is removed from the output.

Table 5-8: SDV Redundancy parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Table 5-7: VOD Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up

Parameter Explanation

Page 122: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring NSG 9000 and ISA SRM Communication

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 119 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

5.7 Configuring NSG 9000 and ISA SRM Communication To receive streams provisioned by the ISA SRM set the following parameters.

1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the ISA tab.

3. Configure the following parameters:

NGOD Redundancy Mode

Select one of the following modes: Hot/Warm - the default option. The service has only one

redundant service. NSG 9000 JOINs the primary service, and upon failure, JOINs the backup multicast group. As a result, the backup service is streamed from the switch to the input port of the device.

Hot/Hot - the service has one redundant service. NSG 9000 JOINs both the primary and backup multicast groups and both groups are steamed to the device. Upon failure, the device inputs the backup service resulting in a short fail-over time.

Hot/Warm/Warm - the service has at least two redundant services. NSG 9000 JOINs the primary multicast group. Upon failure NSG 9000 JOINs the first backup service and as a result the backup service is streamed into the device. If this trial fails, NSG 9000 JOINs the second backup multicast group.

Hot/Hot/Hot - the service has at least two redundant services. NSG 9000 JOINs all three multicast groups. All three services are streamed to the input port to allow short fail-over time.

ISA Redundancy Mode

See NGOD Redundancy Mode explanation.

Table 5-9: NSG 9000 (1.5.x & Up) and ISA SRM communication

Parameter Explanation

Eth1 Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Enable Reset Indication If selected, an indication is sent to the ISA server (either ERM or SRM) upon reset.

SRM IP Address Enter the IP address of the SRM server.

SRM Port Enter the port number over which the device communicates with the SRM.

Connection Type Select either TCP or UDP.

Timeout Period Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between the NSG trials to connect to the ISA server.

Table 5-8: SDV Redundancy parameters

Parameter Explanation

Page 123: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Setting Device Time and Date

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 120 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

5.8 Setting Device Time and Date 1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the Time tab.

3. Configure the parameters as explained below:

5.8.1 Configuring TS Out in NSG 9000 1.5.x & UpFor each NSG 9000 platform record, MCT creates up to 72 transport stream rows under the TS tab. Each row corresponds to one transport stream. The number of output streams is license dependent. If the RF mode is DUAL only two QAM channels are active and only two streams are outputted once a license is granted.

MCT allocates for each port a maximum of four index numbers for the TS IDs. For example, if only two ports are active in the first slot, the TS IDs are 1, 2 and TS IDs 3 & 4 are reserved for when all four channels of the port are active. In the same way TS IDs 7 & 8 are reserved for when in slot two all four channels of the port are active.

Configure the output ports and signals for each stream of each NSG. You must first select a channel bandwidth and then set the other parameters.

To define the out TS parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the QAM & TS tab.

3. Define the parameters as explained in the following table.

Table 5-10: Device Time Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up

Parameter Explanation

IP address Read Only. Displays the IP address of Eth1 port

Enable NTP Select to allow to establish communication with the NTP server, select Enable NTP.

NTP Server Address Enter the IP address of the NTP server.

Time Zone Open the Time Zone list and select the required local time offset to match between the time of the device, that is UTC time, and the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

DST Start Date In Daylight Saving Time Start Date, enter the required date.

SDT End Date In Daylight Saving Time End Date, enter the required date.

Table 5-11: TS Out Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up

Field Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Slot Number Read only. Displays the number of the slots from 1-9. For slots arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware User’s Guide.

Page 124: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Setting Device Time and Date

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 121 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Port Number Read only. Each QAM-RF module has two ports. This field indicates the QAM-RF port number. For QAM-RF port arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware User’s Guide.

TS No. Read only. Displays the ID of the transport stream carried over this QAM-RF channel.

# QAMs Per Port Select the number of active QAM channels. The number of active channels is license dependent and by default two channels are active. Following is a list of the optional number of active channels: 1 - only one active QAM channel 2 - (Default) two active QAM channels 3 - applies to Annex A only, and activates three QAM

channels 4 - applies to Annex B and C only, and activates four

QAM channels. Applies also to Annex A when an NSG-8R1G module is mounted and activates four QAM channels.

Note: In dual, triple and quad, the frequency of the QAM channels is consecutive and each channel utilizes six or eight MHz: In ANNEX B and C - 6MHz and in ANNEX A 8MHz.

QAM Index The numbers of the QAM channel in a sequential order from 1-72. (Basically there are up to 72 output TSs). Along this range, select the required QAM channel. The channels are available according to the defined No. of channels. For example, if the No. of Channels is defined as Triple in slot 1 the available QAM channels are 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 and 7. QAM port 4 and 8 are inactive. You cannot change their No. of channels and their frequency is set to 0.

Serv. Area Indicates the area this transport stream serves. This value is provided by the vendor and may help you when exporting this database to NMX template. Once you export this database to NMX template, you can monitor the serving area and generate statistical reports.Note: If you use Create SAT, serving area should be up to 16bits (range of 1- 65535). See Table 5-7 on page 117.

TS ID The ID number of the Transport Stream ranging from 1->65535. This ID serves in the PAT (Program Allocation Table) of the given TS, to comply with the DVB standard.

QAM Manager The QAM manager determines the functionality of the QAM. The default QAM manager is NGOD ERM. You can select one of the QAM managers listed in the QAM Manager table, see Table 5-12: QAM Manager on page 123.

Table 5-11: TS Out Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up

Field Explanation

Page 125: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Setting Device Time and Date

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 122 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

EIA Type Read only. Displays the EIA type as configured in the RF Module tab.

EIA Channel The default entry. It indicates the channel number for the RF as defined in the EIA standard. When N/A appears, it indicates that the RF frequency does not comply with the frequencies defined by the EIA.

RF Freq. (Hz) By default, indicates the RF frequency according to the EIA channel number configured in EIA Freq.You can define another required frequency and then N/A appears in EIA Freq. The entered frequency should be divisible by 100.

Power per QAM (dBmV) The RF power level in dBmV. When you change the power level of a stream (for example, of stream 1), the power level of its associated stream (for example, stream 5) is automatically updated accordingly. You can specify numbers that contain a decimal digit as well (for example, 50.5).

Interleaver The Interleaver settings determine the robustness of the QAM signal to transmission errors. Recommended values are:ANNEX-A and ANNEX C: 12-17ANNEX-B, Constellation 64: 128-1ANNEX-B, Constellation 256: 128-4 128-1

Spectral Inversion If checked, spectral inversion is enabled

Mute QAM By default the QAM is on and outputting streams. To close the QAM, check the required Mute QAM box.

CW Select for testing purposes only.

Port Enable If checked, opens the RF output of a pair of transport streams unless it is a module of SINGLE. Clear the box to close the outputs. Transport stream output is enabled only if both the IF and Port Enable boxes are checked.

QAM License Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a QAM license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM license was requested and granted.

PM License Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a PM license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM license was requested and granted.

Input Source (Relevant when QAM Mapping Mode is other than Normal.) This filed displays the input port and IP address that is provisioned to this QAM.

NGOD QAM Group Name Enter the QAM group name according to the D6 standard.

Table 5-11: TS Out Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up

Field Explanation

Page 126: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Network Routing Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 123 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

NOTE: To change a QAM Manager, verify that no session, service or PID are provisioned/remuxed to this QAM-RF.

5.9 Configuring Network Routing ParametersSee 4.7 Configuring Network Routing Parameters on page 96.

5.10 Broadcast ApplicationIn Broadcast application mode, NSG 9000 allows to route input content to any output, that is to define a session. NSG 9000 allows to create the following types of sessions:

Pass through - to route complete input MPTSs by using the Pass Through tab.

Service Remux - to route specific MPEG services (programs) using the Service Remux tab

PID Remux - to route individual PIDs using the PID Remux tab

Table 5-12: QAM Manager

QAM-RF Manager Application Explanation

VOD SRM VODService & PID Remux

VOD - the NSG 9000 automatically detects the incoming streams and automatically routes them, according to the indicated UDP, to the required QAM-RF channel. The traffic routed via the QAM-RFs is controlled by the SRM (Session Resource Manager). The SRM may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID remux.

NGOD ERM (default)

VODSDV Service & PID Remux

The NGOD ERM controls the QAM-RFs for binding SDV sessions and for routing VOD sessions. The ERM may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID remux. All QAM-RFs send D6 messages to the NGOD ERM if NGOD ERM server is configured and enabled by selecting Applications > NGOD.

ISA SRM SDVVODService & PID Remux

All QAM-RFs are controlled by ISA (Interactive Service Architecture) using the RPC protocol. VOD sessions are provisioned via ISA or by autodetection. The ISA may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID remux.

Pass Through Pass Through The incoming stream is streamed out without any changes, that is without generating new tables, services or PIDs. The traffic is locally routed (device Passthrough manager) to the QAM-RFs as indicated by the UDP port.

M-CMTS M-CMTS The QAM-RFs deliver M-CMTS data and are controlled by the CMTS.

D2E D2E The D2E server controls the QAMs. Future use only.

Page 127: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Broadcast Application

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 124 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

NOTE: VOD application supports barker channels. A VOD session may stream out also a remuxed service or PID.

5.10.1 Defining a Passthrough SessionThe Pass Through option, allows to output a socket without any changes, that is without remapping and without generating tables. When this option is selected all services in the socket are outputted via the selected output port.

When passing through a TS or a service, you cannot remux a service or a PID included in the pass through TS or service. In addition, you cannot multiplex other input streams to the pass through QAM.

5.10.1.1 Backing Up a Passthrough Session

An input socket may have up to two backup input sockets. By default, the first input socket is the primary socket. If it fails, automatically the following configured socket is activated. If the active input socket is the last one in the list and it fails, the redundancy switch is performed manually only. You need to manually switch to another input socket.

To configure a pass through a session

NOTE: A session is defined as Pass Through during QAM&TS configuration. (See 5.8.1 Configuring TS Out in NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up on page 120).

1. In Details, select the BCST Pass Through tab.

2. Define the parameters as explained in the table below:

Table 5-13: Pass Through Session Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Session ID Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the number of the session in the current page.

Source Type Read only. Indicates whether the session is a Primary or a Backup session. By default, the first input socket is the primary socket.

Enable Backup Select to enable backup. The socket is automatically activated upon failure. See 5.10.1.1 Backing Up a Passthrough Session on page 124.

Active By default the primary input socket is the active one. Once backup is enabled, select the required active session. To view the currently active socket, perform Get From Device.

Multicast Select to enable multicast.

GbE Port No. Enter the required input port.

IP Address Enter the IP address of the selected GbE port.

UDP Port Enter the UDP port.

Source IP Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket.

Page 128: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Broadcast Application

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 125 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

5.10.2 Defining Service Remux SessionsYou can route a service from any input to any output. You can select whether to output the service with its input ID or to remap it.

When provisioning static sessions through the web client or MCT, session ID starts at 10,000 and you can configure up to 500 sessions only.

NOTE: You cannot remux PIDs of remuxed services.

To route a service 1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the Service Remux tab.

3. Click Add. A blank row is added.

4. Define the parameters as explained below:

Output QAM No. Read only. Indicates the output QAM, a number between 1-72.

Table 5-14: Service Remux Session

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Session ID Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the number of the session in the current page.

Multicast Select multicast in case the input stream is a multicast TS.

GbE Port No. Select the input GbE Port.

IP Address Enter the required unicast/multicast IP address of the input port.

UDP Port Enter the UDP port number.

Source IP Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket

Output QAM No.

Enter the QAM number, a number between 1-72, to output the session.

Service ID Enter the required output service ID. You can output the service with the same input ID number or to remap the service.

PID Remap By default, PID Remap is selected. To output a service without remapping its PIDs, de-select PID Remap.If you disable PID remapping, verify there is no PID conflict in the output.

Table 5-13: Pass Through Session Parameters

Parameter Explanation

Page 129: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring M-CMTS Session

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 126 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

5.10.3 Defining PID RemuxYou can route a PID from any input to any output. You can route up to 8 PIDs to an output, or configure up to 576 PID sessions. You can select whether to add a PMT reference to the PID.

You can route an input PID to a few outputs and remap a PID to output it over different outputs. However, you cannot route a PID to the same output with different remapped PIDs.

The PID 0x10 is reserved for the Network Information Table (NIT). If you remux a PID and remap it to PID 0x10, the PAT points to it as a NIT table PID. NSG 9000 ignores any of the PID 0x10 configuration such as PMT reference and a descriptor.

To route a PID1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the PID Remux tab.

3. Click Add. A blank row is added.

4. Define the parameters as explained below:

5.11 Configuring M-CMTS SessionWhen NSG 9000 is integrated in an M-CMTS system, do the following:

Table 5-15: PID Remux Session

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Session ID Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the number of the session in the current page.

Multicast Select multicast in case the input stream is a multicast TS.

GbE Port No. Select the input GbE Port.

IP Address Enter the required unicast/multicast IP address of the input port.

UDP Port Enter the UDP port number.

Source IP Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket

Input PID (Hex)

To define the required PID, in Input PID, enter in hexadecimal the required input PID number.

Output QAM No.

Enter the QAM number, a number between 1-72, to output the PID.

Output PID (Hex)

Enter the output PID number in hexadecimal. You can output the PID with the same input PID number or to remap the PID.

PMT Reference

To allow PMT reference, select the PMT Ref box.

ES Type If you selected the PMT Reference box, enter the ES Type to stream out the PID. This is the ES type that the PMT table points to.

Descriptors Enter the required parameters as defined by the MPEG standard.

Page 130: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring M-CMTS Session

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 127 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Create an M-CMTS session by defining the QAM Manager as M-CMTS

Configure the session - When you configure an M-CMTS session, you choose to output a socket without any changes, that is without remapping and without generating tables.

To create an M-CMTS session1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the QAMs & TS tab.

3. For the required RF Output, open the QAM Manager list and select M-CMTS.

A blank row appears in the M-CTS tab and you can start configuring the session.

To configure an M-CMTS session1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the M-CTS tab.

3. Define the parameters as explained below. When you configure a session, select the required input port and route it to the required output as instructed below:

Table 5-16: M-CMTS Session Parameters

Parameter

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Session ID Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the number of the session in the current page.

DTI Sync Restamping

Relevant to primary DS channels only - To synchronize with the DTI time, select DTI Sync Restamping. The EdgeQAM re-stamps the DTI sync packets.

GbE Port No. To define the input GbE Port, enter the GbE Port, a number between 1-3.

DOCSIS Sync Compensation

Relevant to primary DS channels only - In DOCSIS Sync Compensation, enter the sync compensation. The CMTS core router automatically inserts DOCSIS sync packets into the primary DS QAM channels. To ensure the accuracy of the DOCSIS sync packets, the EdgeQAM re-stamps them. Depending on RF network topology, it may be required to fine-tune the sync messages that flow over the various QAM channels of the EdgeQAM. The fine-tuning ensures consistent timing of CMs across all cable interfaces of the system. To fine-tune the sync offset across cable interfaces, use the DOCSIS Sync Compensation option. The sync offset units are ticks of the CMTS 10.24 MHz clock, where 1 tick=97.6 nano-sec. The typical allowed offset difference between modems is +/- 6 ticks. To define the sync compensation value, measure the average Cable Modem (CM) timing offset difference (you can view the timing offset values via the CMTS console) and calculate the desired compensation value for the QAMs of the port. Typically, the compensation value of adjacent QAMs in the port is identical for each QAM in the port. To set an offset, see Setting DOCSIS Sync Compensation Offset on page 128.

GbE IP Address

Enter the IP address of the selected GbE port.

Page 131: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring NGOD Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 128 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Setting DOCSIS Sync Compensation Offset1. In the M-CMTS tab, select the required M-CMTS sessions.

2. On the Home tab, in the Editor group, click Set Bulk Offset.

3. In Bulk Offset dialog, enter the required DOCSIS sync compensation offset.

4. Click Ok.

The value of DOCSIS Sync Compensation of the selected session changes according to the required offset.

5.12 Configuring NGOD Parameters - NSG 9000 1.5.x & UpWhen the EdgeQAM is part of an NGOD system architecture, you need to configure the following to allow the QAM-RFs of the EdgeQAM to outflow SDV/VOD sessions:

Configure and enable an NGOD ERM server as explained below.

Define the NGOD ERM as the QAM-RF manager of the required QAM-RFs. See 5.8.1 Configuring TS Out in NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up on page 120.

To configure NGOD parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the NGOD tab.

1. Define the parameters as explained below.

NOTE: To allow communication with the ERM, the NSG 9000 device supports the D6 and R6 NGOD protocols. When communicating using the R6 protocol, NSG is always listening on port 554(RTSP).

L2TP Session ID

Enter the required session ID

Output QAM No.

View the QAM number (a number between 1-72) that outputs the session.

Table 5-17: NGOD Parameters NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Streaming Zone Enter the streaming zone as defined in the D6 protocol

NGOD Component Name Enter the component name as defined in the D6 protocol

Bandwidth Update Threshold (kbps)

Define the allowed deviation from the current output bit rate of the device. Whenever the bit rate deviation reaches the value defined in this field, the NSG sends the ERM the updated output bit rate.

Routing Cost Enter a value as defined in the D6 protocol.

Enable ERM (D6) To enable the NSG 9000-ERM communication, select the Enable ERM (D6) box.

Table 5-16: M-CMTS Session Parameters

Parameter

Page 132: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring CAS Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 129 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

5.13 Configuring CAS ParametersFor CAS configuration, see 4.10 Conditional Access System (CAS) on page 100.

For Privacy Mode general overview, see 4.10.2 Privacy Mode on page 103. For configuring Privacy Mode parameters, see following sections.

To configure Privacy Mode parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the Privacy Mode tab.

3. Configure the parameters as explained below:

ERM IP Address Enter the ERM IP address

ERM Port Enter the ERM TCP port number

ERM Version Select the supported version of the protocol. Version 2 is the default version.

ERM Keep Alive Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between the keepalive messages transmitted by the NSG to the ERM. The default is 30 seconds.

Connection Retry Threshold Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between retrials to connect to the ERM to send D6 messages

Hold Time Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between responses to successive Keep Alive and or UPDATE messages received by the NSG. If the duration time elapses and a response is not received, NSG tries to re-establish the connection with the ERM.

Table 5-18: Privacy Mode Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.

Enable PM CAS Select to enable encryption.

Clear To Scramble Transition (sec) Clear To Scramble Transition (sec).

VODS ID The unique ID of the VODS the NSG belongs to.

Warning - ECM Expiration Date (days) The NSG issues a warning if the number of days that have passed since the expiration of the current callback is larger than the value indicated in this field.

Table 5-17: NGOD Parameters NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up

Parameter Explanation

Page 133: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring SNMP Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 130 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

5.14 Configuring SNMP ParametersThe Simple Network Management Protocol allows network management systems to communicate with network elements. By default the SNMP is enabled and you may disable it when required.

The SNMP table allows you to create the following:

A list of SNMP managers to receive messages from network elements. Once you have accomplished that, configure the SNMP Community String.

To set password like strings for the various network elements. The default string value for the Get community is public.

By configuring the SNMP Community string you actually set up different SNMP managers to monitor specific groups of devices.

To set SNMP parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the SNMP tab.

3. Configure the parameters as explained below:

Alarm - ECM Expiration Date (days) The NSG issues an alarm if the number of days that have passed since the expiration of the current callback is larger than the value indicated in this field.

ERS Synch Number View only. The current ERS Synch Number. When this number changes, a new ECM is generated.

ECM Next Callback Date The next time the MCT application needs to check whether a new ECM was generated.

Last ECM Update Date The last time the NSG was updated with a new ECM or callback.

Stream Processing on ECM Expiration Select either of the following: Scramble with Last ECM - All NSGs of the

VODS should be updated with the new ECM.

Don’t Scramble - do not scramble the stream.

Table 5-19: SNMP Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Address The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.

Enable By default SNMP is enabled. Verify that it is enabled. To disable SNMP, de-select Enable SNMP.

Contact Enter contact information

Table 5-18: Privacy Mode Parameters

Parameter Explanation

Page 134: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Generating Access Control List (ACL)

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 131 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

NOTE: You can define up to four hosts.

5.15 Generating Access Control List (ACL)To control the access of other network devices to the NSG 9000 device, you can create either of the following lists of network devices:

Network devices with permission to communicate with the EdgeQAM

Network devices that are prohibited from communicating with the EdgeQAM.

To generate ACL1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the Management tab.

3. Select Enable ACL.

4. Select the required ACL Mode:

Exclude - To create a list of network devices that are prohibited from communicating with the device.

Include - To create a list of network devices that are allowed to communicate with the device.

5. Select the Access Control List tab.

The Add button is enabled.

6. Click Add to add a blank row.

7. Configure the parameters as explained below:

Location (SysLocation)

Enter the location of the device. In other words, the location of the host on which the SNMP agent, or server runs.

Get Community The name of the community having Read access to the network elements. The elements will respond to this community Get commands. The default string is public.

Host 1 IP Address Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG.

Host 1 Version Open the Version list and select the required SNMP version.

Enable Host 1 Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG.

Table 5-20: ACL Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Address The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.

Enable ACL Read only. ACL feature is enabled once you enabled it in the Management tab.

Table 5-19: SNMP Parameters

Parameter Explanation

Page 135: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 5 Configuring NSG 9000-3G Version 1.5 & Up Generating Access Control List (ACL)

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 132 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

For licensing information, see 3.13 Retrieving Licensing Information on page 63.

ACL Mode Read only. Configuration is as defined via the Management tab. Exclude - To create a list of network devices that are prohibited

from communicating with the device. Include - To create a list of network devices that are allowed to

communicate with the device.

Index Read only. A sequential number of the devices listed in the excluded/included list.

IP Address Enter the IP address of the source device, that is the device to communicate or to be banned from communicating with the device.

IP Mask Enter the required IP mask. You can allow/block a group of network devices to communicate with the device.

Table 5-20: ACL Parameters

Parameter Explanation

Page 136: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Overview

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 133 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 6Configuring NSG 9000-6G

6.1 OverviewConfigure the devices via the tabs of the Details section. The tabs and their attributes appear as per the version selected as the expected version. The following sections describe the tabs and their attributes according to the most recent available version.

6.2 Setting NSG Platform Parameters on page 133

6.3 Configuring Management Port on page 135

6.4 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-6G on page 136

6.5 Configuring/Viewing RF Module Parameters on page 139

6.5 Configuring/Viewing RF Module Parameters on page 139

6.7 Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters on page 144

6.9 Configuring SDV Parameters on page 151

6.10 Configuring ISA-Device Communication on page 152

6.11 Setting Device Time and Date on page 155

6.12 Configuring TS Out Parameters on page 156

6.13 Configuring Network Routing Parameters on page 160

6.14 Configuring Broadcast Parameters on page 160

6.15 Configuring M-CMTS Parameters on page 167

6.16 Configuring NGOD Parameters on page 169

6.17 Configuring CAS Parameters on page 170

6.18 Configuring SNMP Parameters on page 174

6.19 Device Authentication on page 175

6.2 Setting NSG Platform ParametersDefining the Platform tab parameters is a one time procedure you should do as you start configuring the device via MCT.

To set platform parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Device Details, select the Platform tab.

3. Define the parameters as explained below:

Page 137: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Setting NSG Platform Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 134 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

NOTE: In Version 2.0 only Chassis Serial Number appears.

Table 6-1: Platform Parameters NSG 9000-6G

Parameter Explanation

ETH1 IP Read only. Displays the IP address of the currently configured Eth1 port.

GbE FPGA Version The version of the FPGA firmware loaded onto the GbE board.

MB Serial Number The serial number of the main board

MB Storage Format Indicates whether a single or dual partition. See3.7 Downloading NSG Firmware on page 44.

Chassis Serial Number The serial number of the chassis.

Force IGMPv2 To set the GbE management to support the IGMPv2 protocol only, select Force IGMP V2. NSG 9000 ignores any IGMPv3 messages and does not generate any IGMPv3 messages.

DTI Card Exist Read only. Indicates whether a DTI card is mounted. This field is updated after performing Get From Device.

Use DTI Clock Select to enslave NSG 9000-6G clock to the DTI clock.

DTI Redundancy Mode To set the DTI port redundancy mode, open the Redundancy Mode list and select one of the following: Manual - you need to select the DTI port. No

automatic switching/activation of ports is done, regardless of the status of the DTI ports.

Automatic (no Auto Revert) - selecting the active port is completely automatic, without any intervention and without any preference of a specific port. If the active port fails, the standby port is activated and assumes the role of "active" as long as it is in normal state. If the latter fails, ports will be switched again. This switching can continue any number of times, without any preference of a specific port.

Automatic (Auto Revert) - in this mode, the selected port (as defined in Selected Port) is always preferred over the other port. In case that the selected port fails, the standby port is automatically activated. Once the selected port is fixed, the NSG automatically switches back to the selected port.

DTI Selected Port To select the active DTI port, open the Selected Port list and select either port 1 or 2.The Selected Port list is disabled if Automatic (no Auto Revert) is selected.

Enable Syslog Select to enable communication with the Syslog server.

Syslog Server IP Address Enabled once Enable Syslog is selected. Enter the IP address of the Syslog server.

Page 138: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring Management Port

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 135 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

6.3 Configuring Management PortThe IP address of the ETH ports or NSG 9000-6G primary IP address is configured as part of the NSG 9000-6G installation. However, when required, you may change the IP address settings.

NOTE: Configure the IP address of ETH1 on a different subnet than that of ETH2. Configuring both ports to be on the same subnet may result in serious network communication problems. NSG 9000-6G uses the ETH1 port to communicate with the network for management purposes and ETH2 for Conditional Access Systems (CAS) purposes.

To change configuration of ETH1 1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Device Details, select the Management tab.

3. Define the parameters as explained below:

Enable HTTPS Read only. By default this option is enabled to allow you to work in secure-mode using the HTTPS protocol.

Enable HTTP Read only. By default this option is enabled. User admin may disable it via the Web client of the device.

Log Status Change Events Send a notification to the alarm log upon a change in the status of the DTI client

Send Traps of Status Change Send an SNMP trap upon a change in the status of the DTI client

Table 6-2: Eth1 Parameters NSG 9000-6G

Parameter Explanation

Eth1 IP Read only. Displays the IP address of the currently configured Eth1 port.

MAC Address Read only. View the MAC address of the device.

Eth1 Mask Enter the Mask address of the Eth1 port

Gateway Enter the IP address of Eth1 gateway

Table 6-1: Platform Parameters NSG 9000-6G

Parameter Explanation

Page 139: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-6G

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 136 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

NOTE: The PHY configuration is available for version 2.1 and up.

6.4 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-6GThe NSG 9000-6G is furnished with eight GbE input ports.

6.4.1 Configuring GbE Port Redundancy

6.4.1.1 Overview

NSG 9000-6G supports 1:1 and N:1 redundancy modes for its GbE input ports. Typical port redundancy configuration depends on the application in which the NSG is deployed as the following scenarios describe:

VOD application - to allow redundancy for the IP unicast VOD streams, you should use 1:1 port redundancy. Select a distinct backup port for each primary port, with the Same IP Address option checked. In this case, only the primary port is active.

Broadcast application - to allow redundancy for IP multicast streams, you should use 1:1 port redundancy.

SDV application - to allow redundancy for the IP multicast SDV streams, use both 1:1 and N:1 redundancy modes:

1:1 port redundancy - define for each primary port a backup port. De-select the Same IP Address option, and set a distinct IP address for the designated backup port. This mode ensures the highest level of protection against various network failures.

N:1 port redundancy - allows an efficient use of the eight available input GbE ports,

Eth1 PHY Configuration To define the physical layers of the Ethernet communication, open the Ethernet list and select one of the following: Auto Neg - The Auto Negotiation is a handshake

protocol used in GbE links. Select this check box to activate the Auto Negotiation protocol only if the other end of the GbE link also uses auto negotiation.

100 BT full - sets the speed to 100 BT and communication mode to full duplex.

10 BT full - sets the speed to 10 BT and communication mode to full duplex.

100 BT half - sets the speed to 100 BT and communication mode to half duplex.

10 BT half - sets the speed to 10 BT and communication mode to half duplex.

Enable Eth2 Click to enable Eth2

Eth2 IP Enter Eth2 IP address

Eth2 IP Mask Enter Eth2 Mask address

Eth2 PHY Configuration Open the list and define the physical layer of the Eth 2 communication as explained in Eth1 PHY.

Table 6-2: Eth1 Parameters NSG 9000-6G

Parameter Explanation

Page 140: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-6G

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 137 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

by utilizing a single backup port for protecting several primary ports. The typical and recommended configuration for this mode is to define two groups of 3 primary ports and one backup port. For example, port 4 backs up ports 1-3 and port 8 backs up ports 5-7. In case of a redundancy switch, the backup port starts transmitting also the streams of the failed primary port(s).If traffic on any given port is expected to exceed 0.5 Gbps, select Exclusive N:1 Backup. The backup port transmits the content of the first failed primary port only and overflow of the backup port is prevented.

In general, the following guidelines apply for the port redundancy feature:

A primary port cannot serve as a backup port

If the Same IP Address option is selected, the backup port is greyed out and the Exclusive N:1 Backup option is automatically enabled. When the primary port fails, the backup port is activated, using the same IP address of the failed port.

Configuring port redundancy, blocks the port configuration. In cast Same IP Address is selected, the IP address of the backup port is automatically changed to the primary port IP address.

Alarm configuration:

By default both Link Down and No Input Traffic alarms trigger port redundancy.

The alarm configuration of the primary port and backup port is the same.

You can configure the alarms of a primary port only.

When selecting a backup Port, the alarm configuration of the primary port also applies to the backup port.

In N:1 port redundancy, the alarm configuration applies to the backup port and to all of the primary ports it backs up. Once you configure the backup port to backup an additional primary port, the alarm configuration automatically applies to the primary port. Any changes to the alarm configuration immediately applies to the backup port and to all primary ports it backs up.

Upon redundancy switch, automatically the configured backup port is activated. If the backup port fails, a redundancy switch is performed to return to the Primary. If the primary port is still faulty, the redundancy mechanism, re-checks the last active port for a momentary failure. If it is still faulty, the redundancy switch reverts to the primary and keeps checking in increased intervals the configured backup port, until detecting an active port.

To configure the NSG 9000-6G GbE ports1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the GbE tab.

3. Enter the required values according to the following provided information:

NOTE: NGOD Input Group Name and Backup port apply to version 2.1 and up only.

Table 6-3: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9000-6G

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.

GbE No. Displays the number of the active port. Switching mode - each GbE port has its own row and both ports are active.

Page 141: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-6G

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 138 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Enable Port Check the box to enable the port. If you clear the box, the port does not admit input even if the other parameters are configured properly.Switching mode - Check the box for each port to enable both ports.

IP Address The IP address of the GbE 1 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected QAM mapping mode.

IP Mask The subnet mask.

Route Refresh If checked, the NSG routinely sends "Ping" requests to the gateway of the GbE port. Requests are sent approximately once per 10 seconds, thus preventing expiration of the route.

Refresh Interval Define, in Msec, how often to send a Ping request.

Auto Negotiation Controls (for each GbE channel separately) whether Auto Negotiation is activated. Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol used in GbE links. Check this option if the other end of the GbE link (typically a GbE switch) also uses Auto Negotiation. Otherwise, the box must be cleared. Activating Auto Negotiation while communicating with a device that does not use it causes communication problems.

NGOD Input Group Name

Enter the name of the input group according to the D6 standard.

NGOD Assigned Bandwidth (Mbps)

Enter the bandwidth of the GbE port assigned for the NGOD ERM. The default is 1000Mbps, that is the full capacity of the port is assigned for the NGOD ERM. You can enter a value between 0-1000 in increments of 100. If you enter 0, the GbE port is not available for the NGOD ERM.

Enable Forwarding

Select to allow NSG 9000 to duplicate the incoming content of this GbE port to the GbE port that is defined as a mirroring port in Destination Port.

Destination Port Select the mirroring port. Connect the mirroring port to devices that accept GbE input such as an MPEG analyzer. For cabling instructions, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware guide

Backup Port If required, select a backup port. If port X is the backup of port Y, port X cannot have a backup port. However, a port may serve as a backup to more than one primary port.Note: Configure port redundancy only when no sessions are provisioned to the port.

Same IP In VOD application - to allow redundancy for IP unicast VOD streams, you should use 1:1 port redundancy. Select a distinct backup port for each primary port, with the Same IP Address option checked.

Trigger Link Down

Applies to NSG 9000-6G version 2.3 and up. By default Link Down is checked and when the alarm is raised, it triggers port redundancy. Uncheck if Link Down should not trigger redundancy.

Table 6-3: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9000-6G

Parameter Explanation

Page 142: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring/Viewing RF Module Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 139 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

6.4.2 Input ForwardingNSG 9000-6G support IP forwarding for monitoring a GbE port. For explanation, see Table 6-3 on page 137.

6.5 Configuring/Viewing RF Module ParametersOnce you read information from the device, the RF Module tab updates to display information about each slot and the installed module. Thus, some of the parameters of the RF Module tab are read only. You can also define global RF module parameters.

6.5.1 QAM-RF Module RedundancyThe RF module redundancy protects the network from a faulty QAM-RF module. The RF module redundancy allows an intra-chassis redundancy switch that does not require an additional backup device. You may define the RF module in slot nine as the redundancy module for any faulty RF module. As a result, the redundancy switch takes place among the QAM-RF modules and not between a primary and backup devices.

For the RF module redundancy to take place, the following should apply:

Up to 8 of the NSG 9000-6G QAM-RF modules in slots one to eight, are configured and provisioned with TSs. The QAM manager of all QAMs of these QAM-RF modules should be Broadcast.

NOTE: RF module redundancy applies to QAM-RF module with Broadcast QAM manager only.

The QAM-RF module in slot nine only is not configured and is reserved for redundancy purposes. However, the QAM manager of all QAMs of module nine is Broadcast.

The Enable Module Redundancy option is selected

Upon failure of any of the active modules, the backup module is automatically activated with the configuration of the faulty QAM-RF module. The typical fail-over time is between 10-20 seconds.

Use the RF module redundancy if the following applies:

All output RF ports of the NSG9000-6G device are combined into a single RF network.

When relatively high availability at reasonable cost is required.

NOTE: If high availability cannot be compromised, use 1:1 device redundancy. It provides protection against various failures and shorter fail-over time.

To view and configure RF module parameters1. Read information from the device (Select the device and click Get from Device.)

2. Select the RF Module tab.

Trigger No Input Traffic

Applies to NSG 9000-6G version 2.3 and up. By default No Input Traffic is checked and when the alarm is raised, it triggers port redundancy. Uncheck, if No Input Traffic should not trigger redundancy.

Table 6-3: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9000-6G

Parameter Explanation

Page 143: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring/Viewing RF Module Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 140 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3. View/configure the following information:

Table 6-4: RF Module tab - NSG 1.5.x & Up

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Slot No. Displays the slot in of the RF module, usually a number between 1- 9.

Actual Card Indicates the actual module type. NSG-6G supports the NSG-8R1G card type. This is an octal card that supports up to eight QAM-RF channels per RF port.

Expected Card Indicates the configured module type.

Annex Select the required ITU-T Annex: Annex-A (DVB) - this mode is used mainly in European

and Asian countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 8 MHz per QAM-RF channel.

Annex-B - this is the mode used in North-American countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel.

Annex-C (Japan) as implied by its name, used mainly in Japan. Similar to Annex-A in the most part, but utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel.

Constellation To define the required constellation, open the Constellation list. The Constellation is the type of Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) used. QAM constellation affects Data Rate and Symbol Rate, and must be set according to HFC network properties. Valid values are:Annex-A or Annex-C 16, 32, 64, 128, 256Annex-B 64 and 256

Symbol Rate Define/view the rate of QAM symbols that are encoded and transmitted per second. You can define the symbol rate in Annex A and C. In Annex B, you can only view its value.

Interleaver 1 View the interleaver values as defined in the QAM tab. NSG 9000 has two optional Interleaver values, set the required value for this interleaver.

Interleaver 2 See Interleaver 1.

QAM Placement Read only. Relevant to QAM OCTAL only. Block is the standard placement of adjacent QAM-RFs along the 48Mhz block, depending on the selected ITU-T Annex.

RF Template Select the required EIA type: EIS-STD - frequency is defined using channel numbers

based on the EIA-STD channel table. See EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps on page 208.

EIA-HRC - RF settings are entered using channel numbers based on the EIA-HRC channel table. See EIA SDT and HRC Standards on page 117.

Page 144: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G RF Module Redundancy

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 141 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

6.6 RF Module Redundancy

6.6.1 RF Module Redundancy OverviewThe RF module redundancy protects the network from a faulty QAM-RF module. The RF module redundancy allows an intra-chassis redundancy switch that does not require an additional backup device. You may define the RF module in slot nine as the redundancy module for any faulty RF module. As a result, the redundancy switch takes place among the QAM-RF modules and not between a primary and backup devices.

For the RF module redundancy to take place, the following should apply:

Up to 8 of the NSG 9000-6G QAM-RF modules in slots one to eight, are configured and provisioned with TSs. The QAM manager of all QAMs of these QAM-RF modules should be Broadcast.

NOTE: RF module redundancy applies to QAM-RF module with Broadcast QAM manager only.

The QAM-RF module in slot nine only is not configured and is reserved for redundancy purposes. However, the QAM manager of all QAMs of module nine is Broadcast.

The Enable Module Redundancy option is selected

Upon failure of any of the active modules, the backup module is automatically activated with the configuration of the faulty QAM-RF module. The typical fail-over time is between 10-20 seconds.

Use the RF module redundancy if the following applies:

All output RF ports of the NSG9000-6G device are combined into a single RF network.

When relatively high availability at reasonable cost is required.

NOTE: If high availability cannot be compromised, use 1:1 device redundancy. It provides protection against various failures and shorter fail-over time.

6.6.2 Enabling the RF Module RedundancyBy default, QAM-RF module redundancy is disabled. To start RF module redundancy, do the following:

1. Read information from the device. (Select the device and click Get from Device.)

2. Select the RF Module tab and select Enable Redundancy for at the required RF Module.

Enable Redundancy Select to enable module redundancy. See 6.5.1 QAM-RF Module Redundancy on page 139.

Table 6-4: RF Module tab - NSG 1.5.x & Up

Parameter Explanation

Page 145: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G RF Module Redundancy

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 142 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

The record of module 9 is disabled. You cannot change the configuration of the backup module

3. In the message that appears, Click OK. The message notifies that once redundancy configuration is applied, the RF ports of module nine will shut down.

4. Send to device.

Once the module is faulty, the module in slot nine takes its place.

6.6.2.1 Manual Fail Over

At any time you can generate a module redundancy switch to a module of your choice.

To generate a manual fail over1. In Device Information section, select the required device.

The Module Redundancy group in enabled.

2. Click RF Module Redundancy group.

Enabled Redundancy for at least one slot is enabled

The record of slot 9 is disabled

Device is selected in Device Information

RF Module Redundancy group is enabled

Page 146: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G RF Module Redundancy

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 143 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

The following dialog appears:

3. RF Module Number displays the module number with RF module redundancy enabled. To select another module, open the RF Module list and select the required RF module.

4. To generate a manual fail-over, click Activate Backup Module.

The Action dialog opens.

5. Wait until action is successfully sent to device.

6.6.3 Reverting Redundancy ModuleReverting back to the primary QAM-RF module once the fault is fixed is manual only.

1. In Device Information section, select the required device.

The Module Redundancy group in enabled.

2. Click RF Module Redundancy group.

The following dialog appears:

3. Click Revert to Primary.

Device is selected in Device Information

RF Module Redundancy group is enabled

Page 147: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 144 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

6.7 Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters

6.7.1 EdgeCluster OverviewThe edgeCluster is comprised of two devices defined as primary and backup. Typically the primary device is active and the backup device is in standby mode. Both devices are configured the same except for the management ports. Both devices are provisioned with sessions that are transmitted by the primary/active device. The backup device stands by ready to become active upon primary failure or manual redundancy switch. Both devices, the primary and the backup communicate with each other via their Eth1 and Eth2 ports:

Eth1 - management port connection. See NSG 9000-6G Hardware and Installation User Guide. Each device is configured with a unique management port, IP address of Eth1.

Eth2 - Each device is configured with a unique IP address of Eth2. The subnet of Eth2 ports should be different than the subnet of Eth1 ports. Eth2 ports are connected with an Ethernet crossover cable.

The edgeCluster system described above applies to both M-CMTS and Broadcast deployments with the following differences:

The following instructions assume that you wish to apply edgeCluster to devices via MCT. The devices are controlled by MCT and you obtained the configuration via Get from Device. See 3.8.2 Synchronizing Configurations on page 54. For the physical connections, see NSG 9000-6G version 2.7 Software Guide.

6.7.2 Enabling EdgeCluster Configuration

NOTE: The following explanation applies to NSG9000-6G version 2.7.0.0 and up.

1. Verify that you are in NSG9000-6G filter.

2. Click MCT button.

Table 6-5: EdgeCluster M-CMTS Versus Broadcast

Item Deployment Difference

Connectivity M-CMTS No use of GbE switch.The downstream GbE port of the GbE source is directly connected to the NSG GbE input ports.

GbE Input Ports

Broadcast The GbE input ports of both NSG devices must be configured the same. However, each device should have a unique IP address of the input port.

M-CMTS The GbE input ports of both NSG devices must be configured the same including the IP addresses of the GbE input ports.Note: For proper edgeCluster operation, GbE ports of the primary and backup devices should have fiber SFPs.

Redundancy Switch

M-CMTS Upon redundancy switch, the active device momentarily shuts up its GbE ports to signal the source device that the device is faulty.

Page 148: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 145 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3. Click MCT Options.

4. Select General.

5. In General Properties section, select EdgeCluster Display.

In the MCT ribbon, in the Home tab, the EdgeCluster group appears. Its options are disabled.

In Device Information, the edgeCluster parameters appear and only EdgeCluster Mode is enabled.

To enable the EdgeCluster group, configure the edgeCluster parameters for both devices with proper peer IP values. Upon selecting one of the edgeCluster devices, the EdgeCluster group is enabled.

Select EdgeCluster

Page 149: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 146 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

The edgeCluster group includes the following buttons:

6.7.3 Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters1. Verify that the expected firmware version of the devices is version 2.7.0.0 and up.

2. Verify that Eth2 of both devices is enabled. In Details, select the Management tab and verify that Enable ETH2 is selected.

3. Configure the edgeCluster parameters as follows:

Table 6-6: EdgeCluster Group

Button Explanation

Sync Cluster Synchronizes the configuration in the cluster. See 6.7.4 Synchronizing Cluster on page 147.

Get State Click to update the current state of the device in the edgeCluster: Active, Standby, Failed, N/A.

Set to Active Enabled when device is part of an edgeCluster and the state of the device is standby or failed.

Table 6-7: EdgeCluster Parameters

Parameter Explanation

EdgeCluster Mode To allow the edgeCluster mode, select either one of the edgeCluster modes: Automatic - the redundancy switch takes place automatically

upon active device failure Manual - the redundancy switch is manual only using the Set to

Active button.Note: When you select one of the above modes, you enable the rest of the edgeCluster parameters that are configurable. Disabled - edgeCluser is disabled. Select this mode in case

you want to disable the edgeCluster mode: All the edgeCluster parameters are disabled.

Role Enabled when Automatic or Manual mode is selected. Select the role of the device: Primary Backup

State Read only. Indicates the state of the device: Active, Standby, or Failed with indication of the last time the state was updated. To update the state, click Get State in the EdgeCluster group.

EdgeCluster Application

Enabled when Automatic or Manual mode is selected. Select either of the following: Broadcast M-CMTS

Eth1 Peer IP Enabled when Automatic or Manual mode is selected. Select the IP address of the Eth1 port of the peer device. The list is populated with all NSG9000-6G devices on the current site with the same version that are not part of another cluster.

Page 150: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 147 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Once you defined the Eht1 Peer IP and Eth2 Peer IP, the EdgeCluster group is enabled.

4. If the configuration of the devices to work in the edgeCluster mode is not the same, move to 6.7.4 Synchronizing Cluster on page 147.

If the configuration of the devices to works in the edgeCluster mode is the same, as explained in 6.7.1 EdgeCluster Overview on page 144, send the edgeCluster configuration to the devices. Click Send to Device per edgeCluster peer.

For guidelines for working with devices in edgeCluster, see 6.7.5 Working with Devices in EdgeCluster on page 148.

6.7.4 Synchronizing ClusterThe configuration of both devices of the edgeCluster should be the same. Sync. Cluster feature, allows you to copy configuration from a device to its peer device. All configuration is copied from one device to the other except for the following:

Eth2 Peer IP Updated as soon as you select the Eth1 peer IP.

MCT Section Parameter that is not copied

Information Device IPDevice NameRackSlotCommentsNMX Network groupActual Firmware VersionExpected Firmware VersionEdge Cluster parameters

Platform Eth1 IPGbE FPGA VersionMB Serial NumberMB Storage FormatChassis Serial Number

GbE IP AddressIP MaskRF Module:Actual CardExpected CardSerial Number

Management MAC AddressEth1 MaskGatewayEth2 IPEth2 IP Mask

Authentication all parameters

SDV ISA redundancy mode

Table 6-7: EdgeCluster Parameters

Parameter Explanation

Page 151: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 148 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

To sync. configuration1. In Device Information section, select a device.

The EdgeCluster group is enabled.

2. Click Sync. Cluster .

The following dialog appears:

3. The From list is populated with both edgeCluster peers. Open the list and select either primary or backup device.

4. The To list is populated with both edgeCluster peers. Open the list and select either primary or backup device.

5. Click Sync Configuration.

6. Wait until the action is completed successfully. The edgeCluster devices have the same configuration.

7. Send the edgeCluster configuration to the devices. Click Send to Device per edgeCluster peer.

6.7.5 Working with Devices in EdgeCluster When you want to get configuration from a device in edgeCluster, by using the Get From

Device feature, the edgeCluster configuration of the device and MCT should be identical.

In the Device Information section, edgeCluster devices are organized in their clusters and each cluster has a unique color.

The Sort button , allows you to sort the clusters. Primary device is usually the first.

6.7.6 EdgeCluster Maintenance6.7.6.1 EdgeCluster and Firmware Upgrade on page 149.

6.7.6.2 Replacing a Faulty Module in EdgeCluster Mode on page 149.

Virtual IPs All parameters

Licensing All parameters

Routing All parameters

MCT Section Parameter that is not copied

Page 152: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring EdgeCluster Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 149 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

6.7.6.1 EdgeCluster and Firmware Upgrade

When you wish to upgrade the firmware of NSG 9000-6G devices working in EdgeCluster mode, perform the following steps in their provided order.

The provided instructions refer to upgrade from firmware version 2.7.0.0 and above. For upgrade of older versions while devices are in edgeCluster mode, call customer support.

To upgrade the firmware of the MSG 9000 device in EdgeCluster Mode

NOTE: During this procedure you are instructed to upgrade the firmware of the Backup device first.

6.7.6.2 Replacing a Faulty Module in EdgeCluster Mode

The following instructions refer to devices that work in edgeCluster mode and you need to replace a faulty QAM-RF module or power supply.

1. Verify that the device with the faulty module is in Standby state.

2. Replace faulty module. See NSG9000-6G Hardware and Installation Guide.

3. Verify that the device is working properly.

Table 6-8: EdgeCluster Firmware Upgrade

Primary Device Backup Device

1. Verify that both devices are working properly.

2. Upgrade the firmware as instructed on page 46.

3. Verify that the device is running properly with the newly installed firmware and apply the required configuration to the device.

Note: The backup device is currently working with the new firmware.

4. In Device Information, select the Backup device.

5. Click Set to Active.

Note: Services are flowing through the backup device

6. Upgrade the firmware as instructed on page 46.

7. Verify that the device is running properly with the newly installed firmware

8. In Device Information, select the primary device.

9. Click Set to Active.

Note: Services are flowing through the primary device.

Page 153: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring VOD Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 150 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4. Apply EdgeCluster by configuring the required role in the edgeCluster. See 6.7.2 Enabling EdgeCluster Configuration on page 144.

6.8 Configuring VOD ParametersConfigure VOD parameters when the NSG 9000-6G device serves as a highly integrated digital video gateway, capable of multiplexing on-demand content streamed over an IP network.

To configure VOD parameters1. In device Information, select the required device

2. In Details, select the VOD tab.

3. Configure the parameters as explained below:

NOTE: Encryption Mode, Emulation Template and Serving Area Location attributes apply to version 2.1 and up only.

Table 6-9: VOD Parameters - NSG 9000-6G

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Encryption Mode Select either of the following:DVB Scrambling - standard scrambling methodPM Scrambling - Motorola’s scrambling methodNote: currently only PM scrambling is available.

Emulation Template The Emulation Template, previously known as QAM Mapping Mode is set by default to Normal. In this case, each RF-QAM port accommodates up to eight channels. The NSG 9000-6G device may emulate the operation of other NSG 9000 3GbE devices which require a different mapping of the QAMs. When emulating an NSG 9000 3GbE, NSG 9000-6G routes the UDP range to a QAM. For example UDP 0x501 is routed to QAM=1.2.1, Service ID=1.You can select one of the customized emulation templates and send them to the device.

PID Remapping You may choose either the Paradigm (e.g. set formula) or the Random options to govern the method elementary streams are remapped and transmitted. The chosen option will take affect only after resetting the NSG. See, 4.4.1 PID Remapping Options on page 85.

From PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected. This is the lower limit of the PID range and is written in hexadecimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0.

To PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected. This is the upper limit of the PID range and is written in hexadecimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0.

Page 154: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring SDV Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 151 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

6.9 Configuring SDV ParametersNSG 9000 supports service redundancy that is activated once the device does not detect the service at the input port. Service redundancy is supported in either of the following methods:

Hot - NSG 9000 JOINs both the primary multicast group and the backup multicast group. Both primary and backup services are at the input to allow short fail-over time.

Warm - NSG 9000 JOINS the primary multicast group only. Once the device does not detect the service at the input, it JOINs the backup multicast group and the fail-over time is longer.

To define SDV redundancy parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the SDV tab.

PAT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams.

PMT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams. The allowed range is 66-990ms. The value chosen must be divisible by 66 and if not, the NSG will round up or down to the closest divisible decimal value.

Update PMT Version Select Update PMT Version to update the PMT version. This version is incremented every time the PMT’s data is changed (e.g. the Video PID changes).

Create SAT Select Create SAT (Service Area Table), to create SAT at the output.Once Create SAT is selected, the following parameters are enabled: Original Network ID Serving Area Location in SAT Note: To create SAT, serving area should be up to 16bits (range of 1- 65535). See Table 6-17 on page 157.

Original Network ID (Hex) If Create SAT is selected, define the original network ID.

Serving Area Location in SAT

If Create SAT is selected, open the Serving Area Location in SAT list and select one of the following: TS ID - the serving area is written to the TS ID. First Service Name - the serving area is written to the

first service name Both - the serving area is written to both the TS ID and

the first service name.

Auto Detection Check to allow auto detected VOD sessions.

Session Inactivity Teardown Threshold (sec)

Enter the allowed duration, in seconds, for session inactivity before the session is removed from the output.

Table 6-9: VOD Parameters - NSG 9000-6G

Parameter Explanation

Page 155: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring ISA-Device Communication

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 152 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3. Configure the following parameters:

6.10 Configuring ISA-Device Communication To receive streams provisioned by ISA, set the following parameters.

1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the ISA tab.

3. Configure the following parameters:

Table 6-10: SDV Redundancy parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

NGOD Redundancy Mode

Select one of the following modes: Hot/Warm - the default option. The service has only one

redundant service. NSG 9000 JOINs the primary service, and upon failure, JOINs the backup multicast group. As a result, the backup service is streamed from the switch to the input port of the device.

Hot/Hot - the service has one redundant service. NSG 9000 JOINs both the primary and backup multicast groups and both groups are steamed to the device. Upon failure, the device inputs the backup service resulting in a short fail-over time.

Hot/Warm/Warm - the service has at least two redundant services. NSG 9000 JOINs the primary multicast group. Upon failure NSG 9000 JOINs the first backup service and as a result the backup service is streamed into the device. If this trial fails, NSG 9000 JOINs the second backup multicast group.

Hot/Hot/Hot - the service has at least two redundant services. NSG 9000 JOINs all three multicast groups. All three services are streamed to the input port to allow short fail-over time.

ISA Redundancy Mode

See NGOD Redundancy Mode explanation.

Table 6-11: NSG 9000-6G and ISA SRM communication

Firmware Version Parameter Explanation

N/A Eth1 Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

N/A Enable Reset Indication

If selected, an indication is sent to the ISA server (either ERM or SRM) upon reset.

N/A SRM IP Address Enter the IP address of the SRM server.

N/A SRM Port Enter the port number over which the device communicates with the SRM.

N/A Timeout Period Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between the NSG trials to connect to the ISA server.

Page 156: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring ISA-Device Communication

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 153 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

N/A Report PMT Section (QuerySessionInfo)

When selected, in QuerySessionInfo, the PMT packet data is sent to the ISA server.

2.6.0-2.6.3

Input Port for Shell Session

Applies to SDV sessions. The input port in the provisioning message is not indicated. The edgeQAM attempts to receive the input stream via the input port indicated in this field. The default port is port 1.

2.6.4 SDV Load-sharing Port A

Applies to SDV sessions. The input port in the provisioning message is not indicated. The edgeQAM attempts to receive the input stream via the input port indicated in this field. The default port is port 1.

SDV Load-sharing Port B

Optional configuration. Configure this parameter when SDV traffic exceeds 1Giga. In this case, the NSG manages the traffic between both input ports for SDV session. The NSG sends the sessions to the input port for SDV session with less traffic. If both ports are equally loaded with traffic, the device sends the traffic to the port defined as the first input port for SDV sessions.

2.6.5 SDV Load-Sharing Port A - D

Applies to ISA-SDV sessions. The input port in the provisioning message is not indicated. The edgeQAM attempts to receive the input stream via the input ports indicated in the SDV Load-Sharing Port A-D boxes. The default port is GbE port 1, indicated in SDV Load-Sharing Port A. You can configure up to four GbE input ports to handle up to four Gigabytes of SDV traffic. The NSG manages the traffic between the selected input ports. The NSG sends the sessions to the input port for SDV session with less traffic. If SDV ports are equally loaded with traffic, the device sends the traffic to the ports according to the sequential order of the port numbers.NOTE: The number of the ports should be in a sequential order from one to eight. Port number can be 0 only if the number of the following SDV port is 0 as well. SDV Load-Sharing Port A cannot be 0. NOTE: GbE input port that is selected as an SDV-load sharing port, cannot be a backup port.

N/A Enable Announce Message

Check to enable the announce message indication required by the ISA and the RCAS protocols. This message is sent to the SRM due to the following:Provisioning a serviceAlarm is raised on the sessionA redundancy switch over the session sourceSession is missing from the output

Table 6-11: NSG 9000-6G and ISA SRM communication

Firmware Version Parameter Explanation

Page 157: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring ISA-Device Communication

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 154 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

6.10.1 Defining Virtual ISA DevicesTo enable the ISA server to handle the full capacity of QAM-RFs of the edgQAM, use the virtual IPs for ISA feature. This feature creates virtual IPs only for the use of the ISA server. To create virtual ISA IPs, do the following:

Create virtual IPs - requires to define the following:

Eth1 Virtual IPs - You can add virtual IPs to ETh1 only. Eth1 virtual IPs should be on a subnet other than Eth2 subnet.

GbE Virtual IPs - You can add GbE virtual IPs to any of the GbE ports. GbE Virtual IP can be the same as the physical GbE IP.

Associate virtual devices with VOD QAM manager or ISA SRM QAM Manager.

6.10.1.1 Creating Virtual Management IPs

1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the Eth1 Virtual IPs (ISA) tab.

3. Click Add. A blank row is added to the table.

4. Configure the following parameters:

6.10.1.2 Creating GbE Virtual IP (ISA)

1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the GbE Virtual IPs (ISA) tab.

3. Click Add. A blank row is added to the table.

4. Configure the following parameters:

Table 6-12: NSG 9000-6G Eth1 Virtual IPs (ISA)

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Index A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs.

Virtual IP Enter the virtual Ethernet port IP address. Virtual IP should be different than the physical Eth1 IP address and on a subnet other than Eth2.

Mask Enter a subnet mask

Status In Status, view the status of the Eth1 virtual IP:In Use - the virtual IP is currently in useNo in Use - the virtual IP is currently not in use

Table 6-13: NSG 9000-6G GbE Virtual IPs (ISA)

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Index A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs.

GbE Port Enter the GbE virtual port number.

Page 158: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Setting Device Time and Date

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 155 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

6.10.1.3 To associate virtual devices with ISA

1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the Virtual Devices (ISA) tab.

3. Click Add. A blank row is added to the table.

4. Configure the following parameters:

6.11 Setting Device Time and Date 1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the Time tab.

3. Configure the parameters as explained below:

Virtual IP Enter the virtual GbE IP address. You can add up to 10 GbE virtual IPs.

Mask Enter the required mask IP

Management IP View the management IP of the virtual GbE port

Table 6-14: NSG 9000-6G Virtual Devices (ISA)

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Index A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs.

Eth1 Virtual IP Open the list and select the required virtual management port. The list is propagated with the Eth1 virtual IPs created previously.

GbE Port: Virtual IP Open the list and select the required virtual GbE port. The list is propagated with GbE IPs that you can use as GbE virtual IPs. The GBE interface appears in the following format:<x>:<virtual GbE IP>, where x is the physical GbE port of the edgeQAM, an integer between 1-8. Select the required GbE interface.

Virtual Input Port Enter the required port according to the ISA provisioning.

Table 6-15: Device Time Parameters - NSG 9000-6G version 2.0

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read Only. Displays the IP address of Eth1 port

Enable NTP Select to allow to establish communication with the NTP server, select Enable NTP.

NTP Server Address Enter the IP address of the NTP server.

Table 6-13: NSG 9000-6G GbE Virtual IPs (ISA)

Parameter Explanation

Page 159: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring TS Out Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 156 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

6.12 Configuring TS Out ParametersFor each NSG 9000 platform record, MCT creates up to 144 transport stream rows under the TS tab. Each row corresponds to one transport stream. The number of output streams is license dependent. If in # QAMs Per Port, two channels are defined, only two QAM channels are active and only two streams are outputted once a license is granted.

MCT allocates for each port a maximum of eight index numbers for the TS IDs. For example, if only two ports are active in the first slot, the TS IDs are 1, 2 and TS IDs 3 - 8 are reserved for when all eight channels of the port are active. In the same way TS IDs 11 - 16 are reserved for when in slot two all eight channels of the port are active.

Configure the output ports and signals for each stream of each NSG. You must first select a channel bandwidth and then set the other parameters.

To define the out TS parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the QAM & TS tab.

3. Define the parameters as explained in the following table.

Time Zone Open the Time Zone list and select the required local time offset to match between the time of the device, that is UTC time, and the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

DST Start Date In Daylight Saving Time Start Date, enter the required date.

SDT End Date In Daylight Saving Time End Date, enter the required date.

Table 6-16: Device Time Parameters - NSG 9000-6G version 2.1 and Up

Parameter Explanation

IP address Read Only. Displays the IP address of Eth1 port

Enable NTP Select to allow to establish communication with the NTP server, select Enable NTP.

NTP Server Address Enter the IP address of the NTP server.

Enable Daylight Saving Select to enable daylight saving time. Once selected, Location and City/Province attributes are enabled. The daylight saving time is automatically defined according to the selected location and city/province.

Time Offset Available when Enable Daylight Saving is not selected. Open the Time Offset list and select the required local time offset to match between the time of the device, that is UTC time, and the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

Location Select the required location.

City/Province Select the required city/province.

Table 6-15: Device Time Parameters - NSG 9000-6G version 2.0

Parameter Explanation

Page 160: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring TS Out Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 157 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

NOTE: PM License and NGOD QAM Group Name apply to version 2.1 and up only.

Table 6-17: TS Out Parameters - NSG 9000-6G

Field Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Slot Number Read only. Displays the number of the slots from 1-9. For slots arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware User’s Guide.

Port Number Read only. Each QAM-RF module has two ports. This field indicates the QAM-RF port number. For QAM-RF port arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware User’s Guide.

QAM No. Read only. Displays the QAM channel in a sequential order from 1-144. (Basically there are up to 144 output TSs). Along this range, select the required QAM channel. The channels are available according to the defined No. of channels. For example, if the No. of Channels is defined as three in slot 1 the available QAM channels are 1, 2, 3, 9, 10 and 11.

# QAMs Per Port Select the number of active QAM channels from 1-8 active channels (Annex B & C) and 1-6 Annex A. The number of active channels is license dependent and by default two channels are active. Note: The frequency of the QAM channels is consecutive and each channel utilizes six or eight MHz: In ANNEX B and C - 6MHz and in ANNEX A 8MHz.

QAM Index Read only. Displays the The number of the QAM channels of the QAM-RF module in a sequential order from2x (1-8).

Serv. Area Indicates the area this transport stream serves. This value is provided by the vendor and may help you when exporting this database to NMX template. Once you export this database to NMX template, you can monitor the serving area and generate statistical reports.Note: If you use Create SAT, serving area should be up to 16bits (range of 1- 65535). See Table 6-9 on page 150.

TS ID The ID number of the Transport Stream ranging from 1->65535. This ID serves in the PAT (Program Allocation Table) of the given TS, to comply with the DVB standard.

QAM Manager The QAM manager determines the functionality of the QAM. The default QAM manager is NGOD ERM. You can select one of the QAM managers listed in the QAM Manager table, see Table 6-18: QAM Manager on page 159.

EIA Type Read only. Displays the EIA type as configured in the RF Module tab.

Page 161: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring TS Out Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 158 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

EIA Channel The default entry. It indicates the channel number for the RF as defined in the EIA standard. When N/A appears, it indicates that the RF frequency does not comply with the frequencies defined by the EIA.

RF Freq. (Hz) By default, indicates the RF frequency according to the EIA channel number configured in EIA Freq.You can define another required frequency and then N/A appears in EIA Freq. The entered frequency should be divisible by 100. The allowed ranges indicating the center frequencies:Annex B & C - 35,000,000-999,000,000 HzAnnex A - 36,000,000-998,000,000 HzFrequencies below 50MHz are for special Broadcast deployments that require IF output.

Power Level per QAM (dBmV)

The RF power level in dBmV. When you change the power level of a stream (for example, of stream 1), the power level of its associated stream (for example, stream 5) is automatically updated accordingly. You can specify numbers that contain a decimal digit as well (for example, 50.5).

Power Level Per QAM (dBuV)

Read only. Indicates the RF power level in dBuV. Once you enter the power level per QAM in dBmV, this parameter is updated to display the power level also in dBuV. Applies to NSG9000-6G version 2.6.0.0 and up.

Interleaver The Interleaver settings determine the robustness of the QAM signal to transmission errors. Recommended values are:ANNEX-A and ANNEX C: 12-17In ANNEX-B Interleaver value depens on the constellationConstellation 64: 128-1, constellation 256: 128-4, 128-1

Spectral Inversion If checked, spectral inversion is enabled

Mute QAM By default the QAM is on and outputting streams. To close the QAM, check the required Mute QAM box.

CW Select for testing purposes only.

Enable RF Port If checked, opens the RF output of a pair of transport streams unless it is a module of SINGLE. Clear the box to close the outputs. Transport stream output is enabled only if both the IF and Port Enable boxes are checked.

QAM License Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a QAM license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM license was requested and granted.

Table 6-17: TS Out Parameters - NSG 9000-6G

Field Explanation

Page 162: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring TS Out Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 159 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

NOTE: Version 2.o supports QAM managers VOD SRM and ISA SRM only.

PM License Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a PM license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM license was requested and granted.

GbE Port The GbE port that is provisioned to the QAM.

GbE IP Address The IP address of the GbE port that is provisioned to the QAM.

UDP Port Min The first UDP port provisioned to the QAM.

UDP Port Max The last UDP port provisioned to the QAM.

NGOD QAM Group Name Enter the QAM group name according to the D6 standard.

Table 6-18: QAM Manager

QAM-RF Manager Application Explanation

VOD SRM VODService & PID Remux

VOD - the NSG 9000 automatically detects the incoming streams and automatically routes them, according to the indicated UDP, to the required QAM-RF channel. The traffic routed via the QAM-RFs is controlled by the SRM (Session Resource Manager). The SRM may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID remux.

NGOD ERM (default)

VODSDV Service & PID Remux

The NGOD ERM controls the QAM-RFs for binding SDV sessions and for routing VOD sessions. The ERM may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID remux. All QAM-RFs send D6 messages to the NGOD ERM if NGOD ERM server is configured and enabled by selecting Applications > NGOD.

ISA SRM SDVVODService & PID Remux

All QAM-RFs are controlled by ISA (Interactive Service Architecture) using the RPC protocol. VOD sessions are provisioned via ISA or by autodetection. The ISA may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID remux.

Broadcast PID Range The device allows to pass a specific range of PIDs from an input stream to the output.

M-CMTS M-CMTS The QAM-RFs deliver M-CMTS data and are controlled by the CMTS.

D2E D2E The D2E server controls the QAMs. Future use only.

Table 6-17: TS Out Parameters - NSG 9000-6G

Field Explanation

Page 163: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring Network Routing Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 160 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

NOTE: To change a QAM Manager, verify that no session, service or PID are provisioned/remuxed to this QAM-RF.

6.13 Configuring Network Routing ParametersSee 4.7 Configuring Network Routing Parameters on page 96.

6.14 Configuring Broadcast ParametersIn Broadcast application mode, NSG 9000-6G allows to route input content to any output, that is to define a session. NSG 9000-6G allows to create the following types of sessions:

Pass through - to route complete input MPTSs by using the Pass Through tab. Applies to version 2.1 and up.

Service Remux - to route specific MPEG services (programs) using the Service Remux tab

PID Remux - to route individual PIDs using the PID Remux tab. Applies to version 2.1 and up.

NOTE: VOD application supports barker channels. A VOD session may stream out also a remuxed service or PID.

6.14.1 Defining Passthrough SessionsThe Pass Through option, allows to output a socket without any changes, that is without remapping and without generating tables. When this option is selected all services in the socket are outputted via the selected output port.

When passing through a TS or a service, you cannot remux a service or a PID included in the pass through TS or service. In addition, you cannot multiplex other input streams to the pass through QAM.

6.14.1.1 Backing Up a Passthrough Session

An input socket may have up to two backup input sockets. By default, the first input socket is the primary socket. If it fails, automatically the following configured socket is activated. If the active input socket is the last one in the list and it fails, the redundancy switch is performed manually only. You need to manually switch to another input socket.

To configure a pass through a session

NOTE: A session is defined as Pass Through during QAM&TS configuration. (See 6.12 Configuring TS Out Parameters on page 156).

1. In Details, select the BCST Pass Through tab.

2. Define the parameters as explained in the table below:

Table 6-19: Pass Through Session Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Session ID Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the number of the session in the current page.

Page 164: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring Broadcast Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 161 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

6.14.2 Defining Service Remux SessionsYou can route a service from any input to any output. You can select whether to output the service with its input ID or to remap it.

When provisioning static sessions through the web client or MCT, session ID starts at 10,000 and you can configure up to 100 sessions only.

NOTE: You cannot remux PIDs of remuxed services.

To route a service 1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the Service Remux tab.

3. Click Add. A blank row is added.

4. Define the parameters as explained below:

Source Type Read only. Indicates whether the session is a Primary or a Backup session. By default, the first input socket is the primary socket.

Enable Backup Select to enable backup. The socket is automatically activated upon failure. See 6.14.1.1 Backing Up a Passthrough Session on page 160.

Active By default the primary input socket is the active one. Once backup is enabled, select the required active session. To view the currently active socket, perform Get From Device.

Multicast Select to enable multicast.

GbE Port No. Enter the required input port.

IP Address Enter the IP address of the selected GbE port.

UDP Port Enter the UDP port.

Source IP Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket.

Output QAM No. Read only. Indicates the output QAM, a number between 1-144.

Table 6-20: Service Remux Session

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Session ID Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the number of the session in the current page.

Multicast Select multicast in case the input stream is a multicast TS.

GbE Port No. Select the input GbE Port.

Table 6-19: Pass Through Session Parameters

Parameter Explanation

Page 165: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring Broadcast Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 162 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

6.14.3 Defining PID RemuxYou can route a PID from any input to any output. You can route up to 8 PIDs to an output, or configure up to 1152 PID sessions. You can select whether to add a PMT reference to the PID.

You can route an input PID to a few outputs and remap a PID to output it over different outputs. However, you cannot route a PID to the same output with different remapped PIDs.

The PID 0x10 is reserved for the Network Information Table (NIT). If you remux a PID and remap it to PID 0x10, the PAT points to it as a NIT table PID. NSG 9000 ignores any of the PID 0x10 configuration such as PMT reference and a descriptor.

To route a PID1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the PID Remux tab.

3. Click Add. A blank row is added.

4. Define the parameters as explained below:

IP Address Enter the required unicast/multicast IP address of the input port.

UDP Port Enter the UDP port number.

Source IP Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket

Output QAM No.

Enter the QAM number, a number between 1-144, to output the session.

Service ID Enter the required output service ID. You can output the service with the same input ID number or to remap the service.

Table 6-21: PID Remux Session

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Session ID Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the number of the session in the current page.

Multicast Select multicast in case the input stream is a multicast TS.

GbE Port No. Select the input GbE Port.

IP Address Enter the required unicast/multicast IP address of the input port.

UDP Port Enter the UDP port number.

Source IP Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket

Input PID (Hex)

To define the required PID, in Input PID, enter in hexadecimal the required input PID number.

Table 6-20: Service Remux Session

Parameter Explanation

Page 166: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring Broadcast Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 163 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

6.14.4 PID Range SessionsNSG 9000-6G allows to manually route various content elements to any output QAM channel. NSG 9000-6G version 2.6.0 and up allows to create PID range sessions. The PID Range option allows to break down the input stream into ranges and to multiplex them via various outputs while remapping the PIDs. To output a socket without any changes, that is without remapping and without generating tables, use the default PID range 0x0 - 0x1FFE.

Defining a PID Range sessions, includes the following stages:

Defining the input stream and PID ranges

Associating the PID ranges with output QAMs

The following table lists PID range specifications

6.14.4.1 Defining PID Ranges of the Input Stream

1. In Device Information, select the required device and verify that the firmware version is NSG 9000-6G version 2.6 and higher.

2. In Details, select the PID Range Input tab.

3. Click Add to add a blank row in the PID Range Input tab.

Input PID (Dec)

Read only. Displays, in decimal, the value you have entered in Input PID (Hex).

Output QAM No.

Enter the QAM number, a number between 1-144, to output the PID.

Output PID (Hex)

Enter the output PID number in hexadecimal. You can output the PID with the same input PID number or to remap the PID.

Output PID (Hex)

Read only. Displays, in decimal, the value you have entered in Output PID (Hex).

PMT Reference

To allow PMT reference, select the PMT Ref box.

ES Type If you selected the PMT Reference box, enter the ES Type to stream out the PID. This is the ES type that the PMT table points to.

Descriptors Enter the required parameters as defined by the MPEG standard.

Table 6-22: PID Range Sessions Specifications

Parameter Specification

Input PID Range inputs Up to 2000 per device

Up to 144 per input

Output QAM Manager Broadcast only

PID Range Output Up to 15 per QAM-RF

Table 6-21: PID Remux Session

Parameter Explanation

Page 167: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring Broadcast Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 164 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4. Configure the parameters as explained below:

6.14.4.2 Configuring PID Range Parameters

1. Once you click the ellipsis under PID Range, at least one record appears. You can add ranges by clicking Add Range in the Editor group.

2. Configure the PID Range parameters according to the following explanation:

NOTE: The default PID range 0x0 - 0x1FFE

Table 6-23: PID Range Input Tab

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.

Session ID Read only. A sequential number to indicate the number of the session in the current page.

Type Indicates whether Primary or backup.

Enable Backup Allows to enable backup session. Enable for backup ports only.See 6.4.1 Configuring GbE Port Redundancy on page 136.

Active By default the primary input socket is the active one. Once you enable a backup socket, check this option to activate the required socket.

Multicast By default, Multicast is enabled. Select to enable multicast. If selected, the IP Address box is enabled.

GbE Port No. In GbE Port No., select the required input port. Once you define the required GbE port, the IP Address field is updated to display the IP address of the selected port.

UDP Port Enter the UDP port of the input GbE port

Source IP Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket.

Source Name Enter the name of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket. The name should be unique.

PID Range Click to open the grid PID Range for Session #. See Table 6-24 on page 164.You can exclude PIDs reserved for NIT, SDT and EIT tables when creating PID range sessions. See 6.14.4.4 Excluding Designated PIDs on page 165.

Output QAMs Click to open the grid Output QAMs for Session #. See Table 6-25 on page 165.

Table 6-24: PID Range Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.

Page 168: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring Broadcast Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 165 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

6.14.4.3 Viewing the Output QAMs

1. Once you click the ellipsis under Output QAMs, you may view the output configuration of the PID Range output. You can view the parameters only after associating a PID range with an output.

2. View the output QAMs per input stream as explained below:

6.14.4.4 Excluding Designated PIDs

You can exclude PIDs reserved for NIT, SDT and EIT tables when creating PID range sessions. You need to add a range of PID range sessions.

1. Once you are configuring an Input PID session click under PID Range the Ellipses button.

Session ID Read only. A sequential number to indicate the number of the session in the current page.

Index Read only. A sequential number to indicate the number of the PID range in the current session. You can add up to 144 ranges per session.

PID Range Start (Hex)

Enter, in hex, the first PID in the PID range

PID Range Start (Dec)

Read only. Displays in decimal the value you have entered in PID Range Start (Hex).

PID Range End (Hex) Enter, in Hex, the last PID in the PID range.

PID Range End (Dec) Read only. Displays in decimal the value you have entered in PID Range End (Hex).

Table 6-25: Output QAMs per Session (Input Stream)

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read Only. The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.

RF Output Read Only. Indicates the RF output port. QAM manager should be Broadcast.

QAM Frequency Read Only. Indicates the frequency of the QAM.

Source Name Read Only. Indicates the name of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket. The name is unique.

Ranges (Hex) Read Only. Indicates the range of the PID Range input session. It shows the start and end PIDs in hexa and in decimal. For example 0x0-0x1FFE (0 - 8190).

PID Remapping Start (hex)

Read Only. Indicates, in hex, the first remapped PID of the PID range.

PID Remapping End (hex)

Read Only. Indicates, in hex, the last remapped PID of the PID range for the selected source.

Table 6-24: PID Range Parameters

Parameter Explanation

Page 169: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring Broadcast Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 166 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

The PID Range Session grid appears and the Add and Add Range buttons are enabled.

2. Click Add Range.

The following dialog appears:

3. Select the designated PIDs you wish to exclude from the range:

NIT - PID 0x10, SDT - PID 0x11, EIT - PID 0x12

4. Click OK.

5. In the grid, rows are added according to your choice. For example, if you wish to exclude the PIDs designated for the NIT, SDT and ERT tables the following ranges are added:

0x0-F and 0x13-1FFF

6.14.4.5 Defining PID Ranges of the Output Stream

1. In Device Information, select the required device and verify that the firmware version is NSG 9000-6G version 2.6 and higher.

2. In Details, select the PID Range Output tab.

3. Click Add to add a blank row in the PID Range Output tab.

PID Range Input Session #

Add and Add Range buttons are enabled

Page 170: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring M-CMTS Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 167 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4. Configure the parameters as explained below:

6.15 Configuring M-CMTS ParametersNOTE: For NSG9000-6G - Applies to version 2.1 and up only.

When the edgeQAM is integrated in an M-CMTS system, do the following:

Create an M-CMTS session by defining the QAM Manager as M-CMTS

Configure the session - When you configure an M-CMTS session, you choose to output a socket without any changes, that is without remapping and without generating tables.

To create an M-CMTS session1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the QAMs & TS tab.

3. For the required RF Output, open the QAM Manager list and select M-CMTS.

A blank row appears in the M-CTS tab and you can start configuring the session.

To configure an M-CMTS session1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the M-CTS tab.

Table 6-26: PID Range Output Tab

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.

RF Output Select the required RF output port. RF output port is indicated as follows x.y.z, where:x - indicates the sloty - indicates the RF portz - indicates the QAM

QAM Frequency Read only. Indicates the frequency of the QAM as defined in 6.12 Configuring TS Out Parameters on page 156.

Source Name Open the list and select the required input according to its source name configured in PID Range Input. See Table 6-23: PID Range Input Tab on page 164.

Ranges (hex) The Ranges list is populated with the PID range session defined for the input. Open the list and select the required PID range of the selected session.

PID Remapping Start (hex)

Enter, in hexadecimal, the first remapped PID of the PID range.

PID Remapping End (hex)

Enter, in hexadecimal, the last remapped PID of the PID range.

Page 171: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring M-CMTS Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 168 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3. Define the parameters as explained below. When you configure a session, select the required input port and route it to the required output as instructed below:

Setting DOCSIS Sync Compensation Offset1. In the M-CMTS tab, select the required M-CMTS sessions.

2. On the Home tab, in the Editor group, click Set Bulk Offset.

3. In Bulk Offset dialog, enter the required DOCSIS sync compensation offset.

4. Click Ok.

The value of DOCSIS Sync Compensation of the selected session changes according to the required offset.

Table 6-27: M-CMTS Session Parameters

Parameter

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Session ID Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the number of the session in the current page.

DTI Sync Restamping

Relevant to primary DS channels only - To synchronize with the DTI time, select DTI Sync Restamping. The EdgeQAM re-stamps the DTI sync packets.

GbE Port No. To define the input GbE Port, enter the GbE Port, a number between 1-8.

IP Address. In unicast - Enter the IP address of the GbE input port.In multicast - Enter the multicast IP address.

DOCSIS Sync Compensation

Relevant to primary DS channels only - In DOCSIS Sync Compensation, enter the sync compensation. The CMTS core router automatically inserts DOCSIS sync packets into the primary DS QAM channels. To ensure the accuracy of the DOCSIS sync packets, the EdgeQAM re-stamps them. Depending on RF network topology, it may be required to fine-tune the sync messages that flow over the various QAM channels of the EdgeQAM. The fine-tuning ensures consistent timing of CMs across all cable interfaces of the system. To fine-tune the sync offset across cable interfaces, use the DOCSIS Sync Compensation option. The sync offset units are ticks of the CMTS 10.24 MHz clock, where 1 tick=97.6 nano-sec. The typical allowed offset difference between modems is +/- 6 ticks. To define the sync compensation value, measure the average Cable Modem (CM) timing offset difference (you can view the timing offset values via the CMTS console) and calculate the desired compensation value for the QAMs of the port. Typically, the compensation value of adjacent QAMs in the port is identical for each QAM in the port. To set an offset, see Setting DOCSIS Sync Compensation Offset on page 168.

L2TP Session ID

Enter the required session ID

Output QAM No.

View the QAM number that outputs the session.

Page 172: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring NGOD Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 169 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

6.16 Configuring NGOD Parameters NOTE: Applies to version 2.1 and up only.

When the EdgeQAM is part of an NGOD system architecture, you need to configure the following to allow the QAM-RFs of the EdgeQAM to outflow SDV/VOD sessions:

Configure and enable an NGOD ERM server as explained below.

Define the NGOD ERM as the QAM-RF manager of the required QAM-RFs. See 6.12 Configuring TS Out Parameters on page 156.

To configure NGOD parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the NGOD tab.

1. Define the parameters as explained below.

NOTE: To allow communication with the ERM, the NSG 9000 device supports the D6 and R6 NGOD protocols. When communicating using the R6 protocol, NSG is always listening on port 554(RTSP).

Table 6-28: NGOD Parameters NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Streaming Zone Enter the streaming zone as defined in the D6 protocol

NGOD Component Name Enter the component name as defined in the D6 protocol

Bandwidth Update Threshold (kbps)

Define the allowed deviation from the current output bit rate of the device. Whenever the bit rate deviation reaches the value defined in this field, the NSG sends the ERM the updated output bit rate.

Routing Cost Enter a value as defined in the D6 protocol (0-255).

Enable ERM (D6) To enable the NSG 9000-ERM communication, select the Enable ERM (D6) box.

ERM IP Address Enter the ERM IP address

ERM IP Port Enter the ERM TCP port number

ERM Version Select the supported version of the protocol. Version 2 is the default version.

ERM Keep Alive Read only. A a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between the keepalive messages transmitted by the NSG to the ERM. The default is 30 seconds.

Connection Retry Threshold Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between retrials to connect to the ERM to send D6 messages

Page 173: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring CAS Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 170 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

6.17 Configuring CAS ParametersThe Conditional Access System (CAS) prevents unauthorized viewing of programs by scrambling services that later on can be decrypted using the correct decrypting key. NSG 9000-6G supports the following CAS systems:

DVB CAS - An encryption mode for the DVB protocol.

Privacy Mode - An encryption mode developed by Motorola Inc. For Privacy Mode general overview and configuration, see 4.10.2 Privacy Mode on page 103.

The following table describes the CAS support of the various NSG 9000-6G versions:

6.17.1 Selecting Encryption ModeBy default the CAS mode is PM Scrambling. To change to DVB-CAS mode, do the following:

1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select VOD tab > Encryption Mode parameter.

3. Open the Encryption Mode list and select DVB Scrambling.

The configurable DVB Scrambling parameters which are arranged in the DVB CAS related tabs are enabled.

6.17.2 Configuring PM Parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the Privacy Mode tab.

Hold Time Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between responses to successive Keep Alive and or UPDATE messages received by the NSG. If the duration time elapses and a response is not received, NSG tries to re-establish the connection with the ERM.

Table 6-29: CAS Support of NSG 9000-6G versions

NSG 9000-6G Version CAS Support Instructions Reference

Version 2.1 - 2.2 Privacy Mode scrambling General overview, see page 103. Configuration instructions, see page 170

Version 2.3 & up Privacy Mode scrambling DVB CAS

Privacy Mode:General overview, see page 103. Configuration instructions, see page 170.DVB CAS - see page 171.

Table 6-28: NGOD Parameters NSG 9000 1.5.x & Up

Parameter Explanation

Page 174: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring CAS Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 171 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3. Configure the parameters as explained below:

6.17.3 Configuring DVB CAS DVB-CAS is applied in the following two options:

Tier-based encryption - all VOD sessions are encrypted using a single ECM.

Session-based encryption - default option. Every VOD session is encrypted using a dedicated control word, and requires its own ECM.

Some of the DVB-CAS configuration parameters apply to both modes, while other parameters are relevant only to one of the modes.

6.17.3.1 Enabling CAS Mode

To configure the DVB Scrambling parameters, select the DVB Scrambling mode. See 6.17.1 Selecting Encryption Mode on page 170.

Table 6-30: Privacy Mode Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.

Enable PM CAS Select to enable encryption.

Clear To Scramble Transition (sec) Clear To Scramble Transition (sec).

VODS ID The unique ID of the VODS the NSG belongs to.

Warning - ECM Expiration Date (days) The NSG issues a warning if the number of days that have passed since the expiration of the current callback is larger than the value indicated in this field.

Alarm - ECM Expiration Date (days) The NSG issues an alarm if the number of days that have passed since the expiration of the current callback is larger than the value indicated in this field.

ERS Synch Number View only. The current ERS Synch Number. When this number changes, a new ECM is generated.

ECM Next Callback Date The next time the MCT application needs to check whether a new ECM was generated.

Last ECM Update Date The last time the NSG was updated with a new ECM or callback.

Stream Processing on ECM Expiration Select either of the following: Scramble with Last ECM - All NSGs of the

VODS should be updated with the new ECM.

Don’t Scramble - do not scramble the stream.

Page 175: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring CAS Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 172 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

6.17.3.2 Defining DVB Scrambling Parameters

Once you selected the DVB Scrambling mode configure the DVB Settings. The following table lists the DVB Scrambling parameters:

Table 6-31: DVB Scrambling Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Indicates the management IP address of the NSG 9000-6G device.

Enable DVB CAS Select to enable DVB CAS. Only once enabled, the DVB CAS configuration can be sent to the device.

EIS-SCS Port Define the TCP port through which NSG communicates with the EIS. Valid values range between 1-65535.

CP Duration (sec) The Crypto Period defines how often the NSG changes the control word (or "key") for encrypted services. The default CP duration is 15 seconds and you can enter the required value.Valid values range between 1-6554.

ECMG Failover Retries

Define the number of times the NSG 9000 unit tries to establish communication with the Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG) before issuing the alarm ECMG Connection Failure.

CA Descriptor Location

Select a location in the PMT for the CA descriptor. The CA descriptor may appear either in a service or elementary level or in both levels.

CAS Type Select either of the following: Session based - default option. The EIS is external and it issues

an SCG for each service for which encryption is required. When selected, the DVB Session based features are enabled.

Tier based - all services are scrambled with the same control word and ECM and there is no external EIS. Once selected, the DVB Tier Based features are enabled.

Clear to Scramble Period

Enter the clear time in seconds before starting to scramble the service, once the SCG is received. Valid values range between 0-9999. The default value is 0 seconds.

Block Upon Failure Applies to DVB Tier based. Select Block Upon Failure, to allow the device to block the stream to protect the content. When a stream is blocked, no picture appears on the end user screen. This action takes place in case the NSG 9000 could not establish communication with the ECMG

Failed to Scramble Timeout

In Failed to Scramble Timeout (Sec), define the period of time between outputting the service and recognizing CAS failure. When CAS failure is recognized the following takes place: Scrambling with the last available ECM Block the stream. Applies in case ECM is not available and Block

Upon Failure is selected. Outflow a clear stream. Applies in case ECM is not available and

Block Upon Failure is not selected.

Page 176: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring CAS Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 173 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

6.17.3.3 Configuring ECMs in DVB Tier Based Mode

NSG 9000-6G supports SimulCrypt in DVB Tier Based mode and it allows to encrypt the content with up to 3 different Conditional Access Systems. You can define up to three ECMs each with its own Access Criteria.

6.17.3.4 Defining ECMGs and NSG 9000 Communication Parameters

This section instructs you on how to define the ECMG & NSG 9000 communication parameters.

TS ID Provisioning Applies to DVB Session Based. In TS ID Provisioning, select how to generate the TS ID to be provisioned: Direct - The default option. The provisioned TS ID is the same as

the output TS ID. By QAM Index - The provisioned TS ID is according to the QAM

number that is a number between 1-144.

Table 6-32: DVB CAS Tier Based

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP The IP address of the device

Active Select to enable the ECM record.

ECM PID Enter the ECM PID.

SuperCAS ID (Hex) Enter the Super CAS ID of the ECMG as provided by the vendor.

Access Criteria (Hex) Enter an access criteria as provided by the vendor.

Table 6-33: ECMG and NSG 9000-6G Communication Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP The IP address of the device

ECMG No. A sequential number of the ECMG device connected to the NSG. You can add up to 10 ECMGs.

Active Select to enable the record.

Name Enter the name of the ECMG brand.

SuperCAS ID A 32-bit hexadecimal number that consists of the 16-bit CA vendor ID and an additional 16-bit number that distinguishes one ECM generator from another for the same CAS vendor. The super CAS ID determines which access criteria is coupled with each ECMG. The CAS vendor provides this value.

Protocol Revision Specifies the CAS mode of operation. Select Revision 1, 2 or 3 for SimulCrypt Ver. 1, 2 or 3 respectively.

Table 6-31: DVB Scrambling Parameters

Parameter Explanation

Page 177: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Configuring SNMP Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 174 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

6.18 Configuring SNMP ParametersThe Simple Network Management Protocol allows network management systems to communicate with network elements. By default the SNMP is enabled and you may disable it when required.

The SNMP table allows you to create the following:

A list of SNMP managers to receive messages from network elements. Once you have accomplished that, configure the SNMP Community String.

To set password like strings for the various network elements. The default string value for the Get community is public.

By configuring the SNMP Community string you actually set up different SNMP managers to monitor specific groups of devices.

To set SNMP parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the SNMP tab.

3. Configure the parameters as explained below:

IP Address The IP address of the ECMG. The CAS vendor provides this value.

Port The number (in decimal format) of the TCP port used to connect the ECMG. The CAS vendor provides this value.Channel ID

Channel ID Indicates the channel of communication between the NSG and the ECMG.

Table 6-34: SNMP Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Address The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.

Enable By default SNMP is enabled. Verify that it is enabled. To disable SNMP, de-select Enable SNMP.

Contact Enter contact information

Location (SysLocation)

Enter the location of the device. In other words, the location of the host on which the SNMP agent, or server runs.

Get Community The name of the community having Read access to the network elements. The elements will respond to this community Get commands. The default string is public.

Host 1 IP Address Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG.

Host 1 Version Open the Version list and select the required SNMP version.

Table 6-33: ECMG and NSG 9000-6G Communication Parameters

Parameter Explanation

Page 178: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Device Authentication

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 175 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

NOTE: You can define up to four hosts.

For licensing information, see 3.13 Retrieving Licensing Information on page 63.

6.19 Device AuthenticationNSG 9000 may use a Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) server to authenticate and authorize users who are trying to log into the NSG 9000.

To configure RADIUS username and password for a mass of devices, use the Authentication tab.

To configure the RADIUS username and password for a single device, use the Authentication tab per device.

NOTE: If you entered authentication details in both Authentication tab of the device and the MCT Ribbon Authentication tab, access is granted according to the details

entered in the Authentication tab of the device.

To enable the RADIUS authentication, the following should apply:

Connection to a RADIUS server - NSG is defined as a client of the RADIUS server

NSG 9000 is configured to work in Remote mode

The RADIUS server database should include three types of authorized NSG users. Any user defined in the RADIUS server must belong to one of these groups:

Admin

Config

Guest

To set Authentication parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device and verify that the firmware version is

NSG 9000-6G version 2.6 and higher.

2. In Details, select the Authentication tab.

3. Configure the parameters as explained below:

Enable Host 1 Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG.

Table 6-35: SNMP Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.

Table 6-34: SNMP Parameters

Parameter Explanation

Page 179: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 6 Configuring NSG 9000-6G Device Authentication

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 176 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Authentication Type Open the Authentication Type list and select either of the following:Local - authentication and authorization is performed locally, against the database of the NSG 9000-6GRemote-RADIUS - authentication and authorization is performed by the RADIUS server. When selected, move to the following step to configure the required parameters.

Username Enter the username as defined on the RADIUS server

Password Enter the password as defined on the RADIUS server

RADIUS Server IP Enter the IP address of the RADIUS server

RADIUS Port Enter the port number over which the RADIUS sever communicates with the NSG 9000.

RADIUS Secret Enter a confidential string that is shared between the device and the RADIUS server.

RADIUS Timeout Enter in seconds, the time allowed to elapse between an NSG 9000 request and a response from the RADIUS server.

Table 6-35: SNMP Parameters

Parameter Explanation

Page 180: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Overview

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 177 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Chapter 7Configuring NSG 9000-40G

7.1 OverviewConfigure the devices via the tabs of the Details section. The tabs and their attributes appear as per the version selected as the expected version. The following sections describe the tabs and their attributes according to the most recent available version.

7.2 Setting NSG Platform Parameters on page 177

7.3 Configuring Management Port on page 179

7.4 Configuring Ethernet Ports on page 180

7.5 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-40G on page 180

7.6 Configuring/Viewing RF Module Parameters on page 183

7.7 Configuring/Viewing RF Ports Parameters on page 185

7.8 Configuring TS Out Parameters on page 187

7.9 Configuring the VOD Application on page 190

7.10 Configuring SDV Parameters on page 192

7.11 Configuring ISA-Device Communication on page 192

7.12 Defining Virtual Devices on page 194

7.13 Setting Device Time and Date on page 197

7.14 Configuring Network Routing Parameters on page 198

7.15 Configuring Broadcast Parameters on page 199

7.16 Configuring M-CMTS Parameters on page 201

7.17 Configuring NGOD Parameters on page 201

7.18 Configuring CAS Parameters on page 202

7.19 Configuring SNMP Parameters on page 203

7.2 Setting NSG Platform ParametersDefining the Platform tab parameters is a one time procedure you should do as you start configuring the device via MCT.

To set platform parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Device Details, select the Platform tab.

3. Define the parameters as explained below:

Page 181: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Setting NSG Platform Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 178 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

.

Table 7-1: Platform Parameters NSG 9000-40G

Parameter Explanation

ETH1 IP Read only. Displays the IP address of the currently configured Eth1 port.

MB Serial Number The serial number of the main board

Chassis Serial Number The serial number of the chassis.

Main Board FPGA Version Read only. The FPGA version as retrieved from the device.

LLC Version Read only. Indicates the embedded version of the controller

Power Supply 1 Read only. Indicates power supply type as Table 7-2 on page 179 shows.

Power Supply 2 Read only. Indicates power supply type as Table 7-2 on page 179 shows.

Force IGMPv2 To set the GbE management to support the IGMPv2 protocol only, select Force IGMP V2. NSG 9000 ignores any IGMPv3 messages and does not generate any IGMPv3 messages.

Use DTI Clock From version 3.2 and up. Select to enslave NSG 9000 clock to the DTI clock.

DTI Redundancy Mode To set the DTI port redundancy mode, open the Redundancy Mode list and select one of the following: Manual - you need to select the DTI port. No

automatic switching/activation of ports is done, regardless of the status of the DTI ports.

Automatic (no Auto Revert) - selecting the active port is completely automatic, without any intervention and without any preference of a specific port. If the active port fails, the standby port is activated and assumes the role of "active" as long as it is in normal state. If the latter fails, ports will be switched again. This switching can continue any number of times, without any preference of a specific port.

Automatic (Auto Revert) - in this mode, the selected port (as defined in Selected Port) is always preferred over the other port. In case that the selected port fails, the standby port is automatically activated. Once the selected port is fixed, the NSG automatically switches back to the selected port.

DTI Selected Port To select the active DTI port, open the Selected Port list and select either port 1 or 2.The Selected Port list is disabled if Automatic (no Auto Revert) is selected.

Page 182: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring Management Port

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 179 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

7.3 Configuring Management PortThe IP address of the ETH ports or NSG 9000-40G primary IP address is configured as part of the NSG 9000-40G installation. However, when required, you may change the IP address settings.

NOTE: Configure the IP address of ETH1 on a different subnet than that of ETH2. Configuring both ports to be on the same subnet may result in serious network communication problems. NSG 9000-40G uses the ETH1 port to communicate with the network for management purposes and ETH2 for Conditional Access Systems (CAS) purposes.

To change configuration of ETH1 1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Device Details, select the Platform tab.

3. In Eth1, enter the required IP address.

4. Send to device.

Enable Syslog Select to enable communication with the Syslog server.

Syslog Server IP Address Enabled once Enable Syslog is selected. Enter the IP address of the Syslog server.

Enable HTTPS Read only. By default this option is enabled to allow you to work in secure-mode using the HTTPS protocol.

Enable HTTP Read only. By default this option is enabled. User admin may disable it via the Web client of the device.

Table 7-2: Power Supply Type Web Client Indication

Power Supply Type

Web Client Indication Comments

AC 500/665W AC Verify that the actual working power supply is of 665W. Check the Harmonic part number on the power supply labeling.

DC 500/665W DC Verify that the actual working power supply is of 665W. Check the Harmonic part number on the power supply labeling.

AC 800W-Ven2

DC 800W-Ven2

AC 800W-Ven1

DC 800W-Ven1

Table 7-1: Platform Parameters NSG 9000-40G

Parameter Explanation

Page 183: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring Ethernet Ports

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 180 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

To define additional parameters of the management port, see 7.4 Configuring Ethernet Ports on page 180.

7.4 Configuring Ethernet Ports1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Device Details, select the Management tab.

3. Define the parameters as explained below:

7.5 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-40GNSG 9000-40G version 3.1 and up is furnished with eight GbE input ports. The GbE ports operate as eight independent ports receiving eight different feeds. The input rate of the GbE ports is as follows:

GbE 1-4 - 1G

GbE 5-8 - 1G/10G (configurable)

NSG 9000-40G version 3.0 supports four GbE input ports only.

7.5.1 Configuring GbE Port Redundancy

7.5.1.1 Overview

NSG 9000-40G supports 1:1 and N:1 redundancy modes for its GbE input ports. Typical port redundancy configuration depends on the application in which the NSG is deployed as the following scenarios describe:

VOD application - to allow redundancy for the IP unicast VOD streams, you should use 1:1 port redundancy. Select a distinct backup port for each primary port, with the Same IP Address option checked. In this case, only the primary port is active.

SDV application - to allow redundancy for the IP mulicast SDV streams, use both 1:1 and N:1 redundancy modes:

Table 7-3: Eth1 Parameters NSG 9000-40G

Parameter Explanation

Eth1 IP Read only. Displays the IP address of the currently configured Eth1 port.

MAC Address Read only. View the MAC address of the device.

Eth1 Mask Enter the Mask address of the Eth1 port

Gateway Enter the IP address of Eth1 gateway

Enable Eth2 Click to enable Eth2

Eth2 IP Enter Eth2 IP address

Eth2 IP Mask Enter Eth2 Mask address

DNS Server IP Address

Applies to NSG9000-40G version 3.2.3 and up. Enter the IP of the Domain Name Server. This applies when the EdgeQAM is part of an NGOD system architecture. See 7.17 Configuring NGOD Parameters on page 201.

Page 184: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-40G

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 181 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

1:1 port redundancy - define for each primary port a backup port. De-select the Same IP Address option, and set a distinct IP address for the designated backup port. This mode ensures the highest level of protection against various network failures.

N:1 port redundancy - allows an efficient use of the eight available input GbE ports, by utilizing a single backup port for protecting several primary ports. The typical and recommended configuration for this mode is to define two groups of 3 primary ports and one backup port. For example, port 4 backs up ports 1-3 and port 8 backs up ports 5-7. In case of a redundancy switch, the backup port starts transmitting also the streams of the failed primary port(s).If traffic on any given port is expected to exceed 0.5 Gbps, the backup port transmits the content of the first failed primary port only and overflow of the backup port is prevented.

NOTE: Beware that GbE ports 1-4 are of 1G and GbE ports 5-8 are of either 1 or 10G.

In general, the following guidelines apply for the port redundancy feature:

A primary port cannot serve as a backup port

If the Same IP Address option is selected, the backup port is greyed out. When the primary port fails, the backup port is activated, using the same IP address of the failed port.

Configuring port redundancy, blocks the port configuration. In case Same IP Address is selected, the IP address of the backup port is automatically changed to the primary port IP address.

NOTE: Verify that the capacity of the backup port matches or exceeds the actual capacity of the primary port.

Alarm configuration:

By default both Link Down and No Input Traffic alarms trigger port redundancy.

The alarm configuration of the primary port and backup port is the same.

You can configure the alarms of a primary port only.

When selecting a backup Port, the alarm configuration of the primary port also applies to the backup port.

In N:1 port redundancy, the alarm configuration applies to the backup port and to all of the primary ports it backs up. Once you configure the backup port to backup an additional primary port, the alarm configuration automatically applies to the primary port. Any changes to the alarm configuration immediately applies to the backup port and to all primary ports it backs up.

To configure the NSG 9000-40G GbE ports1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the GbE tab.

3. Enter the required values according to the following provided information:

NOTE: NGOD Input Group Name and Backup port apply to version 2.1 and up only.

Table 7-4: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9000-40G

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Page 185: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9000-40G

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 182 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

GbE No. Read only. Displays the number of the active port. Switching mode - each GbE port has its own row and both ports are active.

Enable Port Check the box to enable the port. If you clear the box, the port does not admit input even if the other parameters are configured properly.Switching mode - Check the box for each port to enable both ports.

Speed Applies to 10GbE only (GbE5-GbE8). Open the list and select the required speed. Changes to the speed, require device reboot:1Gbps10Gbps

Auto Negotiation Applies to 1G speed. When Same IP is checked, you cannot apply Auto Negotiation.Controls (for each GbE channel separately) whether Auto Negotiation is activated. Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol used in GbE links. Check this option if the other end of the GbE link (typically a GbE switch) also uses Auto Negotiation. Otherwise, the box must be cleared. Activating Auto Negotiation while communicating with a device that does not use it causes communication problems.

IP Address The IP address of the GbE 1 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected QAM mapping mode.

IP Mask The subnet mask.

Route Refresh If checked, the NSG routinely sends "Ping" requests to the gateway of the GbE port. Requests are sent approximately once per 10 seconds, thus preventing expiration of the route.

Refresh Interval Define, in Msec, how often to send a Ping request.

NGOD Input Group Name

Enter the name of the input group according to the D6 standard.

NGOD Assigned Bandwidth(Mbps)

Applies to NSG 9000-40G version 3.1 and up.Enter the bandwidth of the GbE port assigned for the NGOD ERM. The default is 1000MB for both 1G and 10G GbE ports. If the assigned bandwidth is 1000M/10,000M the full capacity of the 1G/10G port is assigned for the NGOD ERM, respectively. You can enter a value between 0-1000/0-10,000 in increments of 100, respectively. If you enter 0, the GbE port is not available for the NGOD ERM.

Backup Port If required, select a backup port. If port X is the backup of port Y, port X cannot have a backup port. However, a port may serve as a backup to more than one primary port.Note: Configure port redundancy only when no sessions are provisioned to the port.

Table 7-4: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9000-40G

Parameter Explanation

Page 186: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring/Viewing RF Module Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 183 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

7.6 Configuring/Viewing RF Module ParametersOnce you read information from the device, the RF Module tab updates to display information about each slot and the installed module. Thus, some of the parameters of the RF Module tab are read only. You can also define global RF module parameters.

The available 24 QAM-RF channels of each RF port are divided into groups. The QAM channels of each group share the same configuration: ITU-T Annex, constellation, symbol rate and interleaver. Group configuration applies to both RF ports of the module. Currently the default groups are:

To view and configure RF module parameters

1. Read information from the device (Select the device and click Get from Device.)

2. Select the RF Module tab.

3. View/configure the following information:

Same IP In VOD application - to allow redundancy for IP unicast VOD streams, you should use 1:1 port redundancy. Select a distinct backup port for each primary port, with the Same IP Address option checked. Once you select Same IP Address the following takes place: The IP address of the backup port changes to the IP address of

the primary port The backup port is disabled The routing tables of the primary port are copied to the backup

port routing tables. Once Same IP Address is unchecked, the routing tables of the backup port are removed.

Trigger Link Down

By default Link Down is checked and when the alarm is raised, it triggers port redundancy. Uncheck if Link Down should not trigger redundancy.

Trigger No Input Traffic

By default No Input Traffic is checked and when the alarm is raised, it triggers port redundancy. Uncheck, if No Input Traffic should not trigger redundancy.

Table 7-5: Available QAM-RF Groups

Group ITU-T Annex Operation Mode

2x4 QAM-RF channels1x9 QAM-RF channels

A 4A-4A-9A

2x6 QAM-RF channels 1x12 QAM-RF channels

B 6B-6B-12B

Table 7-6: RF Module tab - NSG 9000-40G

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Table 7-4: GbE Port Parameters for NSG 9000-40G

Parameter Explanation

Page 187: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring/Viewing RF Module Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 184 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Slot No. Read only. Displays the slot in of the RF module, usually a number between 1- 9.

Actual Card Read only. Indicates the actual module type. NSG-40G supports the NSG-8R1G card type. This is an octal card that supports up to eight QAM-RF channels per RF port.

Expected Card Read only. Indicates the configured module type.

Serial Number Read only. The serial number of the mounted module. This field is populated after Get from Device only.

Operation Mode Open the list and select the required QAM-RFs group. The default is 6B-6B-12B

RF Template Open the list to select the required RF template:Frequency - frequency is entered explicitly as numeric frequency valuesEIS-STD - frequency is defined using channel numbers based on the EIA-STD channel table. See EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps on page 208.EIA-HRC - RF settings are entered using channel numbers based on the EIA-HRC channel table. See EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps on page 208.When changing the RF Template to EIS-STD or EIA-HRC, MCT checks if the frequencies of each port matches the EIA table. If not, a message appears notifying that all frequencies are set to the default frequency according to the EIA channel. In addition, all RF Ports are disabled.

Group 1 Annex Select the required ITU-T Annex: Annex-A (DVB) - this mode is used mainly in European

and Asian countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 8 MHz per QAM-RF channel.

Annex-B - this is the mode used in North-American countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel.

Annex-C (Japan) as implied by its name, used mainly in Japan. Similar to Annex-A in the most part, but utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel.

Group 1Constellation To define the required constellation, open the Constellation list. The Constellation is the type of Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) used. QAM constellation affects Data Rate and Symbol Rate, and must be set according to HFC network properties. Valid values are:Annex-A or Annex-C 16, 32, 64, 128, 256Annex-B 64 and 256

Group 1Symbol Rate Define/view the rate of QAM symbols that are encoded and transmitted per second. You can define the symbol rate in Annex A and C. In Annex B, you can only view its value.

Table 7-6: RF Module tab - NSG 9000-40G

Parameter Explanation

Page 188: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring/Viewing RF Ports Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 185 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

7.7 Configuring/Viewing RF Ports ParametersEach RF Port spans across 384MHz transmission frequency of the 1GHz spectrum (to be accurate 50MHZ-1GHz).

You can locate along the spectrum, for each RF port, its Span window = 384MHz divided into steps of 6MHz for Annex B or 8MHz for Annex A. You can set the Span window with accuracy of up to 1Khz along the 1GHz spectrum. For example 228.001 - 612.001.

Once you defined the Span window, locate the available QAM channels along this span window while each QAM channel utilizes six MHz in Annex B. For example, if the Span Window = 384 MHz and Span Start = 228 MHz, you can configure QAM channels with any frequency between 228Mhz - 612 MHz. However, the frequency of the QAM channels is defined according to the center frequency. In this case, the first QAM channel valid frequency

Group 1Interleaver 1 View the interleaver values as defined in the QAM tab. NSG 9000 has two optional Interleaver values, set the required value for this interleaver.

Group 1Interleaver 2 See Interleaver 1

Group 2 Annex See Group 1 Annex

Group 2 Constellation See Group 1 Constellation

Group 2 Symbol Rate See Group 1 Symbol rate

Group 2 Interleaver 1 See Group 1 Interleaver 1

Group 2 Interleaver 2 See Group 1 Interleaver 2

Group 3 Annex See Group 1 Annex

Group 3 Constellation See Group 1 Constellation

Group 3 Symbol Rate See Group 1 Symbol Rate

Group 3 Interleaver 1 See Group 1 Interleaver 1

Group 3 Interleaver 2 See Group 1 Interleaver 2

Table 7-6: RF Module tab - NSG 9000-40G

Parameter Explanation

Page 189: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring/Viewing RF Ports Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 186 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

is 231MHz in steps of 6MHz. For example:231, 237, 243… You can locate the QAMs any where along the Span window. For example, QAM #4 can be located at 255MHz. For Annex B, QAM frequency is calculated according to the following formula:

fQAM = SpanStart + 3MHz + n*6MHz <SpanEndn={0.....63}

For Annex A, QAM frequency is calculated according to the following formula:

fQAM = SpanStart + 4MHz + n*8MHz <SpanEndn={0.....47}

When Span window moves, all the allocated QAMs move accordingly. So if e.g. the window moves by +1Mhz, all allocated QAMs shift by +1Mhz.

To view and configure RF port parameters1. Read information from the device (Select the device and click Get from Device.)

2. Select the RF Port tab.

3. View/configure the following information:

Table 7-7: RF Port tab - NSG 9000-40G

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Slot No. Read only. Displays the slot in of the RF module, usually a number between 1- 9. This is a linked parameter. Click it to view/configure slot parameters.

Port No. Read only. Displays the RF port number.

RF Enable Select to enable the RF port. Enable the port only after completing the output configuration.

#QAMs per Port Available if Optimized ACP is not selected. Select the number of QAM channels that can be activated, turned On/Off. For Annex B, select QAM channels from 1-24, for Annex A, select between 1-17. To decrease the number of QAMs per channel, indicate specifically the QAMs you wish to mute. See QAM On in Table 7-8 on page 187.Select # QAMs per port according to your future upgrade of network path. The # of power lever per QAM depends on the # QAMs per port.

Frequency Range Start (MHz)

To locate the span window, along the spectrum, enter the Span Start and Span End

Frequency Range End(MHz) To locate the span window, along the spectrum, enter the Span Start and Span End

Page 190: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring TS Out Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 187 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

7.8 Configuring TS Out ParametersMCT creates a record for each transport stream. MCT allocates for each port a maximum of 24 QAM numbers.

To define the out TS parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the QAM & TS tab.

3. Define the parameters as explained in the following table.

Optimized ACP To apply ACP (Adjacent Channel Protection), select this option. If ACP is applied, # QAMs per Port, is disabled. The device automatically balances the RF gain chain according to the number of currently active QAMs. However, if you mute a channel, while Optimized ACP is selected, a momentary disruption to video on other channels may ensue.

Power Level Per QAM (dBmV)

Define the QAM power level for all QAM channels within the port. View the allowed range next to the Power Level Per QAM box

Power Level Per QAM (dBuV)

Read only. Indicates the RF power level in dBuV. Once you enter the power level per QAM in dBmV, this parameter is updated to display the power level also in dBuV. Applies to NSG9000-40G version 3.2.0.0 and up.

Enable Variable Equalizer Select Variable Equalizer to enable the Cable Attenuation option.

Cable Attenuation (dB) To yield the best frequency flatness at the end of the cable, open the Cable Attenuation list and select a value where the cable attenuation provides pre-emphasis to high frequencies. To flatten the residual frequency ripple/tilt, refer to User Attenuation in Table 7-8 on page 187.

Table 7-8: TS Out Parameters - NSG 9000-40G

Field Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

QAM Index Read only. Displays the number of the QAM channels of the QAM-RF module in a sequential order from 1-648. Currently, the QAMs are listed in groups of 24 with jumps of 12 QAMs in between each group.

Slot No. Read only and a linked parameter. Indicated the number of the slot on which the module is mounted.

Table 7-7: RF Port tab - NSG 9000-40G

Parameter Explanation

Page 191: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring TS Out Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 188 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Port Number Read only and a linked parameter. Each QAM-RF module has two ports. This field indicates the QAM-RF port number. For QAM-RF port arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware User’s Guide.

QAM No. Read only. Displays the QAM channel in a sequential order in relation to the QAM channels in the port, from 1-24.

# QAMs Per Port A linked parameter. Indicates the number of QAM channels, from 1-24 Annex B, or 1-17 Annex A, that can be activated, turned On/Off.

TS ID The ID number of the Transport Stream ranging from 1->65535. This ID serves in the PAT (Program Allocation Table) of the given TS, to comply with the DVB standard.

Group (Annex/Constellation/SR)

Read only. Indicates the group this TS belongs to in the following pattern:Group number (Annex/Constellation/Symbol Rate)

QAM Manager The QAM manager determines the functionality of the QAM. The default QAM manager is VOD SRM. You can select one of the QAM managers listed in the QAM Manager table, see Table 7-9: QAM Manager on page 189.

Serv. Area Indicates the area this transport stream serves. This value is provided by the vendor and may help you when exporting this database to NMX template. Once you export this database to NMX template, you can monitor the serving area and generate statistical reports.Note: If you use Create SAT, serving area should be up to 16bits (range of 1- 65535). See Table 7-10 on page 190.

EIA Type Read only, linked parameter. Displays the EIA type as configured in the RF Module tab.

EIA Channel The default entry. It indicates the channel number for the RF as defined in the EIA standard. When N/A appears, it indicates that the RF frequency does not comply with the frequencies defined by the EIA.

RF Freq. (MHz) By default, indicates the RF frequency according to the EIA channel number configured in EIA Freq.You can define another required frequency and then N/A appears in EIA Freq. The entered frequency should be divisible by 100.

User Attenuation(dB) To flatten the residual frequency ripple/tilt, open the list and select the required value. The available range is between 0-2 dB with steps of 0.1dB.

Interleaver The Interleaver settings determine the robustness of the QAM signal to transmission errors. Recommended values are:ANNEX-A and ANNEX C: 12-17In ANNEX-B, Interleaver value depens on the constellationConstellation 64: 128-1, constellation 256: 128-4, 128-1

Table 7-8: TS Out Parameters - NSG 9000-40G

Field Explanation

Page 192: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring TS Out Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 189 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Spectral Inversion The spectral inversion is an advanced QAM configuration parameter. If checked, spectral inversion is enabled

QAM On By default the QAM is on and outputting streams. To close the QAM, de-select the required QAM On box.

CW Select for testing purposes only. Enabled if QAM On is selected.

PM Enable Check to enable Motorola Privacy mode for this TS.

NGOD QAM Group Name

Enter the QAM-group name that the NSG reports on via its NGOD-D6 messages.

Table 7-9: QAM Manager

QAM-RF Manager Application Explanation

VOD SRM (default)

VODService & PID Remux

VOD - the NSG 9000 automatically detects the incoming streams and automatically routes them, according to the indicated UDP, to the required QAM-RF channel. The traffic routed via the QAM-RFs is controlled by the SRM (Session Resource Manager). The SRM may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID remux.

NGOD ERM VODSDV Service & PID Remux

The NGOD ERM controls the QAM-RFs for binding SDV sessions and for routing VOD sessions. The ERM may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID remux. All QAM-RFs send D6 messages to the NGOD ERM if NGOD ERM server is configured and enabled by selecting Applications > NGOD.

ISA SRM SDVVODService & PID Remux

All QAM-RFs are controlled by ISA (Interactive Service Architecture) using the RPC protocol. VOD sessions are provisioned via ISA or by autodetection. The ISA may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID remux.

Pass Through (not supported)

Pass Through The incoming stream is streamed out without any changes, that is without generating new tables, services or PIDs. The traffic is locally routed (device Passthrough manager) to the QAM-RFs as indicated by the UDP port.

M-CMTS M-CMTS The QAM-RFs deliver M-CMTS data and are controlled by the CMTS.

D2E (not supported)

D2E The D2E server controls the QAMs. Future use only.

Table 7-8: TS Out Parameters - NSG 9000-40G

Field Explanation

Page 193: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring the VOD Application

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 190 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

NOTE: To change a QAM Manager, verify that no session, service or PID are provisioned/remuxed to this QAM-RF.

7.9 Configuring the VOD ApplicationConfigure VOD parameters when the NSG 9000-40G device serves as a highly integrated digital video gateway, capable of multiplexing on-demand content streamed over an IP network.

To configure VOD parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device

2. In Details, select the VOD tab.

3. Configure the parameters as explained below:

Table 7-10: VOD Parameters - NSG 9000-40G

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Encryption Mode Select either of the following:DVB Scrambling - standard scrambling methodPM Scrambling - Motorola’s scrambling methodNote: currently only PM scrambling is available.

Emulation Template By default, for VOD streams, autodetected is enabled and the streams are multiplexed to the required QAM, according to the UDP port number. However, you can set the QAM mapping method as follows: Normal 10/6 - according to this QAM mapping the

10MSB indicate the designated QAM-RF output and the 6LSB the output service ID. Thus, the allowed ranges are: QAM-RF 0-1023, Service ID 0-63.

NSG 9000-6G - a QAM mapping that allows NSG 9000-40G to emulate six NSG 9000-6G devices.

Custom - you can prepare your own QAM mapping file and load it to the NSG. The streams are out flowing according to the QAM mapping defined in the customized file. You can edit the file via MCT Options. See 3.12 Creating Custom QAM Mapping File on page 60.

Note: Any changes to the Custom file requires to import it to the device. Virtualization (8/8 bits) - according to this QAM

mapping the 8MSB indicate the designated QAM-RF output and the 8LSB the output service ID. Thus, the allowed ranges are: QAM-RF 0-255, Service ID 0-63.

Service ID Base Enter the first service in the mapping range. The default is 1.

Page 194: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring the VOD Application

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 191 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

PID Remapping You may choose either the Paradigm (e.g. set formula) or the Random options to govern the method elementary streams are remapped and transmitted. The chosen option will take affect only after resetting the NSG. See, 4.4.1 PID Remapping Options on page 85.

From PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected. This is the lower limit of the PID range and is written in hexadecimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0.

To PID (Hex) Available only when Random is selected. This is the upper limit of the PID range and is written in hexadecimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0.

PAT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams.

PMT Interval Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PMT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams. The allowed range is 66-990ms. The value chosen must be divisible by 66 and if not, the NSG will round up or down to the closest divisible decimal value.

Update PMT Version Select Update PMT Version to update the PMT version. This version is incremented every time the PMT’s data is changed (e.g. the Video PID changes).

Create SAT Select Create SAT (Service Area Table), to create SAT at the output.Once Create SAT is selected, the following parameters are enabled: Original Network ID Serving Area Location in SAT Note: To create SAT, serving area should be up to 16bits (range of 1- 65535). See Table 7-8 on page 187.

Original Network ID (Hex) If Create SAT is selected, define the original network ID.

Serving Area Location in SAT

If Create SAT is selected, open the Serving Area Location in SAT list and select one of the following: TS ID - the serving area is written to the TS ID. First Service Name - the serving area is written to the

first service name Both - the serving area is written to both the TS ID and

the first service name.

Auto Detection Check to allow auto detected VOD sessions.

Session Inactivity Teardown Threshold (sec)

Enter the allowed duration, in seconds, for session inactivity before the session is removed from the output.

Table 7-10: VOD Parameters - NSG 9000-40G

Parameter Explanation

Page 195: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring SDV Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 192 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

7.10 Configuring SDV ParametersNSG 9000 supports service redundancy that is activated once the device does not detect the service at the input port. Service redundancy is supported in either of the following methods:

Hot - NSG 9000 JOINs both the primary multicast group and the backup multicast group. Both primary and backup services are at the input to allow short fail-over time.

Warm - NSG 9000 JOINS the primary multicast group only. Once the device does not detect the service at the input, it JOINs the backup multicast group and the fail-over time is longer.

To define SDV redundancy parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the SDV tab.

3. Configure the following parameters:

7.11 Configuring ISA-Device Communication To receive streams provisioned by ISA, set the following parameters.

1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the ISA tab.

Table 7-11: SDV Redundancy parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

NGOD Redundancy Mode

Select one of the following modes: Hot/Warm - the default option. The service has only one

redundant service. NSG 9000 JOINs the primary service, and upon failure, JOINs the backup multicast group. As a result, the backup service is streamed from the switch to the input port of the device.

Hot/Hot - the service has one redundant service. NSG 9000 JOINs both the primary and backup multicast groups and both groups are steamed to the device. Upon failure, the device inputs the backup service resulting in a short fail-over time.

Hot/Warm/Warm - the service has at least two redundant services. NSG 9000 JOINs the primary multicast group. Upon failure NSG 9000 JOINs the first backup service and as a result the backup service is streamed into the device. If this trial fails, NSG 9000 JOINs the second backup multicast group.

Hot/Hot/Hot - the service has at least two redundant services. NSG 9000 JOINs all three multicast groups. All three services are streamed to the input port to allow short fail-over time.

ISA Redundancy Mode

See NGOD Redundancy Mode explanation. Currently disabled.

Page 196: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring ISA-Device Communication

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 193 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3. Configure the following parameters:

Table 7-12: NSG 9000-40G and ISA SRM communication

Firmware Version Parameter Explanation

N/A Eth1 Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

N/A Enable Reset Indication If selected, an indication is sent to the ISA server (either ERM or SRM) upon reset.

N/A SRM IP Address Enter the IP address of the SRM server.

N/A Timeout Period Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between the NSG trials to connect to the ISA server.

N/A Report PMT Section (QuerySessionInfo)

When selected, in QuerySessionInfo, the PMT packet data is sent to the ISA server.

Up to version 3.1

Input Port for Shell Session

Applies to SDV sessions. The input port in the provisioning message is not indicated. The edgeQAM attempts to receive the input stream via the input port indicated in the Input Port for Shell Session box. The default port is port 1.

Input Port for Shell Session 2

Optional configuration. Configure this parameter when SDV traffic exceeds 1Giga. In this case, the NSG manages the traffic between both input ports for SDV session. The NSG sends the sessions to the input port for SDV session with less traffic. If both ports are equally loaded with traffic, the device sends the traffic to the port defined as the first input port for Shell sessions.

Ver. 3.1 SDV Load-sharing Port A

Applies to SDV sessions. The input port in the provisioning message is not indicated. The edgeQAM attempts to receive the input stream via the input port indicated in this field. The default port is port 1.

SDV Load-sharing Port B

Optional configuration. Configure this parameter when SDV traffic exceeds 1Giga. In this case, the NSG manages the traffic between both input ports for SDV session. The NSG sends the sessions to the input port for SDV session with less traffic. If both ports are equally loaded with traffic, the device sends the traffic to the port defined as the first input port for SDV sessions.

Page 197: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Defining Virtual Devices

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 194 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

7.12 Defining Virtual DevicesThe virtual device feature allows either of the following:

VOD - allows to use UDP QAM mapping of legacy NSG devices with NSG9000-40G as the edgeQAM.

ISA server - allows the ISA server to handle the full capacity of QAM-RFs of the edgQAM.

To create virtual IPs, do the following unless you are using the physical management port IP or the physical GbE port IP for the virtual devices:

Eth1 Virtual IPs - You can add virtual IPs to ETh1 only. Eth1 virtual IPs should be on a subnet other than Eth2 subnet. You can add up to 18 Eth1 virtual IPs.

GbE Virtual IPs - You can add GbE virtual IPs to any of the active GbE ports. You can add up to 10 GbE virtual IPs.

NOTE: In VOD - each GbE port has a unique QAM mapping scheme.In ISA - all GbE ports share the same QAM mapping.

Create virtual devices

7.12.1 Creating Virtual Management IPs1. In Device Information, select the required device.

Ver. 3.2 and up

SDV Load-Sharing Port A - D

Applies to ISA-SDV sessions. The input port in the provisioning message is not indicated. The edgeQAM attempts to receive the input stream via the input ports indicated in the SDV Load-Sharing Port A-D boxes. The default port is GbE port 1, indicated in SDV Load-Sharing Port A. You can configure up to four GbE input ports to handle up to four Gigabytes of SDV traffic. The NSG manages the traffic between the selected input ports. The NSG sends the sessions to the input port for SDV session with less traffic. If SDV ports are equally loaded with traffic, the device sends the traffic to the ports according to the sequential order of the port numbers.NOTE: The number of the ports should be in a sequential order from one to eight. Port number can be 0 only if the number of the following SDV port is 0 as well. SDV Load-Sharing Port A cannot be 0. NOTE: GbE input port that is selected as an SDV-load sharing port, cannot be a backup port.

N/A Enable Announce Message

Check to enable the announce message indication required by the ISA and the RCAS protocols. This message is sent to the SRM due to the following:Provisioning a serviceAlarm is raised on the sessionA redundancy switch over the session sourceSession is missing from the output

Table 7-12: NSG 9000-40G and ISA SRM communication

Firmware Version Parameter Explanation

Page 198: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Defining Virtual Devices

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 195 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

2. In Details, select the Eth1 Virtual IPs tab.

3. Click Add. A blank row is added to the table.

4. Configure the following parameters:

7.12.2 Creating GbE Virtual IP 1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the GbE Virtual IPs tab.

3. Click Add. A blank row is added to the table.

4. Configure the following parameters:

7.12.3 Creating Virtual Devices 1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the Virtual Devices tab.

The Sort button is enabled. See page 19.

3. Click Add. A blank row is added to the table.

Table 7-13: NSG 9000-40G Eth1 Virtual IPs

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Index A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs.

Virtual IP Enter the virtual Ethernet port IP address. Virtual IP should be unique.

Mask Enter a subnet mask

Status In Status, view the status of the Eth1 virtual IP:In Use - the virtual IP is currently in useNo in Use - the virtual IP is currently not in use

Table 7-14: NSG 9000-40G GbE Virtual IPs

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Index A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs.

GbE Port Enter the GbE port number.

Virtual IP Enter the virtual GbE IP address. You can add up to 10 GbE virtual IPs. You can also select

Mask Enter the required mask IP

Management IP View the management IP of the virtual GbE port

Page 199: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Defining Virtual Devices

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 196 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

4. Configure the following parameters:

Table 7-15: NSG 9000-40G Version 3.1 and up Virtual Devices

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Virtual Device Index A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs.

Eth1 Virtual IP Open the list and select the required virtual management port. The list is propagated with the Eth1 virtual IPs created previously.

VOD/ISA Mode Open the QAM Manager list and select the required QAM manager. Select either VOD, for VOD systems and ISA for ISA SRM systems.In case of ISA, all GbE ports share the same QAM mapping scheme.In case of VOD, each GbE port has its unique QAM mapping scheme.

GbE Port: Virtual IP Open the list and select the required virtual GbE port. The list is propagated with GbE IPs that you can use as GbE virtual IPs. The GbE interface appears in the following format:<x>:<virtual GbE IP>, where x is the physical GbE port of the edgeQAM, an integer between 1-8. Select the required GbE interface. To allow load balancing, select 0-Load Balancing.

Bitmap/Encoded In ISA, only Encoded is available.In VOD, select one of the following methods to present the output: Bitmap- each of the MSB bits represents an Output TS of the

NSG. The Output TS is determined by the bit that is set to 1. For example, TS 8 is represented by 10000000, TS 3 by 00000100 and TS 9 by 00000001.

Encoded - the Output TS is determined by the numeric value of the MSB. For example, TS 8 is represented by 00001000, TS 3 by 00000011 and TS 9 by 00001001.

QAM Mapping Click to open a subsection - ISA QAM Mapping for Virtual Device #. See Table 7-16 on page 197.

Virtual Input Port Applies to ISA SRM only. Enter the required port according to the ISA provisioning.

Enable Reset Indication

Applies to ISA SRM only. In Enable Reset Indication, check to enable this message required by the RPC protocol for the virtual device. This message is sent to the SRM who manages the device, after device reset or after management communication is back in case of communication problems. By default this parameter is off.

Page 200: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Setting Device Time and Date

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 197 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

7.13 Setting Device Time and Date 1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the Time tab.

Reset Ind. Mac Address

Applies to ISA SRM only. Reset Ind. MAC Addr. - the MAC Address of the management port of the device/virtual device. This MAC address appears in the Reset Indication message only to identify the device. Once you click Enable Reset Indication, the Reset Ind. MAC Address is calculated as follows:Reset Indication MAC AddressFirst two bytes = First two bytes of the Eth1 MAC addressFour last bytes= The IP address of the Eth1/virtual Eth1 in hexadecimal.For example: Reset Indication is 00:90:0a:28:17:b1, where:00:90 - derived from the MAC address of Eth1, which is 00:90:F0:02:12:A80a:28:17:b1 - the IP address of the virtual Eth1, which is 10.40.23.177. In hex = 0a:28:17:b1.

Table 7-16: QAM Mapping

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Virtual Device Index A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs.

QAM Mapping Index A sequential number to indicate the QAM index per virtual device.

Virtual QAM In Virtual QAM, enter the QAM number (1-255) in the provisioning message.The UDP Port Range is automatically displayed.

Physical QAM In Physical QAM, enter the physical QAM to output the content. Indicate the physical QAM in the following pattern: x.y.z, where x - module number, an integer between 1-9y - port number, an integer between 1-2z - QAM channel number, an integer between 1-24

UDP Port Range Applies to VOD only. Once you enter the virtual QAM, the UDP port range is automatically displayed.

Table 7-15: NSG 9000-40G Version 3.1 and up Virtual Devices

Parameter Explanation

Page 201: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring Network Routing Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 198 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

3. Configure the parameters as explained below:

7.14 Configuring Network Routing ParametersOnce you add an NSG device, 20 blank routing records appear in the Routing tab for each GbE/Eth port. Define routing records when you need the NSG to communicate with components, such as CAS, that are not included in the NSG's subnet. You can define up to 20 routing IP addresses for each NSG.

NOTE: You cannot configure a routing table for a port that serves as a backup port with Same IP enabled. See 7.5.1 Configuring GbE Port Redundancy on page 180.

To configure network route parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the Routing tab.

3. Configure the required parameters as explained below:

Table 7-17: Device Time Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read Only. Displays the IP address of Eth1 port

Enable NTP Select to allow to establish communication with the NTP server, select Enable NTP.

NTP Server IP Address Enter the IP address of the NTP server.

Enable Daylight Saving Select to enable daylight saving time. Once selected, Location and City/Province attributes are enabled. The daylight saving time is automatically defined according to the selected location and city/province.

Time Offset Available when Enable Daylight Saving is not selected. Open the Time Offset list and select the required local time offset to match between the time of the device, that is UTC time, and the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

Location Select the required location.

City/Province Select the required city/province.

Table 7-18: Network Routing Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Routing No. An index number for each routing record.

Active Select to activate the route. To deactivate the route, de-select the. Once you activate the route, you can set its parameters.

Destination Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the IP address of the destination device.

Page 202: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring Broadcast Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 199 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

7.15 Configuring Broadcast ParametersIn Broadcast application mode, NSG 9000-40G allows to manually route various content elements to any output QAM channel. NSG 9000-40G allows to create the following types of sessions:

Service Remux - to route specific MPEG services (programs) using the Service Remux tab

PID Remux - to route individual PIDs using the PID Remux tab.

7.15.1 Defining Service Remux SessionsNSG9000-40G supports RTSP (Real Time Streaming Protocol) sessions provisioned over RTSP protocol. NSG9000-40G supports up to 2000 NGOD sessions.

You can route a service from any input to any output. You can select whether to:

Output the service with its input ID or to remap it.

Remap the service PIDs.

NSG9000-40G supports RTSP provision with alternate sources. See 7.10 Configuring SDV Parameters on page 192.

When provisioning sessions through the web client or MCT, session ID starts at 10,000.

To route a service 1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the Service Remux tab.

3. Click Add. A blank row is added.

4. Define the parameters as explained below:

Mask Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the subnet mask.

Gateway Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway must be in the same subnet as the NSG ETH2 port.

Interface Select the port the routing is associated with. You can select one of the following: Eth1/2, GbE1-8.

Table 7-19: Service Remux Session

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Session ID Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the number of the session in the current page.

Multicast Select multicast in case the input stream is a multicast TS. If selected, the IP address is removed from the IP Address box.

GbE Port No. Select the input GbE Port.

IP Address Enter the required unicast/multicast IP address of the input port.

Table 7-18: Network Routing Parameters

Parameter Explanation

Page 203: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring Broadcast Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 200 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

7.15.2 Defining PID Remux SessionsYou can route a PID from any input to any output. You can select whether to add a PMT reference to the PID.

You can route an input PID to a few outputs and remap a PID to output it over different outputs. However, you cannot route a PID to the same output with different remapped PIDs.

The PID 0x10 is reserved for the Network Information Table (NIT). If you remux a PID and remap it to PID 0x10, the PAT points to it as a NIT table PID. NSG 9000-40G ignores any of the PID 0x10 configuration such as PMT reference and added descriptor.

NOTE: You cannot remux PIDs of remuxed services.

To configure a PID Remux Session1. In Device Information, select the required device.

NOTE: Expected Firmware Version should be 3.2.1 and up.

2. In Details, select the PID Remux tab.

3. Click Add. A blank row is added.

4. Define the parameters as explained below:

UDP Port Enter the UDP port number.

Source IP Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket

Output QAM No.

Enter the QAM number, a number between 1-648, to output the session.

Service ID Enter the required output service ID. You can output the service with the same input ID number or to remap the service.

No PID Remap

To output a service without remapping its PIDs, select No PID Remap.If you disable PID remapping, verify there is no PID conflict in the output.

Table 7-20: PID Remux Session

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Session ID Read only. A sequential number starting at 1, to indicate the number of the session in the current page.

Multicast Select multicast in case the input stream is a multicast TS. If selected, the IP address is removed from the IP Address box and a default multicast IP address appears.

GbE Port No. Select the input GbE Port.

IP Address Enter the required unicast/multicast IP address of the input port.

Table 7-19: Service Remux Session

Parameter Explanation

Page 204: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring M-CMTS Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 201 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

7.16 Configuring M-CMTS ParametersSee 6.15 Configuring M-CMTS Parameters on page 167.

7.17 Configuring NGOD Parameters When the EdgeQAM is part of an NGOD system architecture, you need to configure the following to allow the QAM-RFs of the EdgeQAM to outflow SDV/VOD sessions:

Configure and enable an NGOD ERM server as explained below.

Define the NGOD ERM as the QAM-RF manager of the required QAM-RFs. See 7.8 Configuring TS Out Parameters on page 187.

To configure NGOD parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the NGOD tab.

3. Define the parameters as explained below.

UDP Port Enter the UDP port number.

Source IP Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket

Input PID (Hex)

Enter the PID at the input.

Output QAM No.

Open the list and select the required QAM-RF channel in the following format: X.Y.Z where:X – module number (1…9)Y – RF port number (1..2)Z – channel number (1…24 - Annex B/17Annex A)

Output PID (Hex)

Enter the required ID, in hexameter, of the ES at the output. You can output the PID with the same input ID or to remap the PID

PMT Reference

To allow PMT reference, select the PMT Ref box. PID 0x10 is excluded. It does not support PMT reference and added descriptor.

ES Type Enter the ES Type to stream out the PID. This is the ES type that the PMT table points to. See, Standard ES Types and Descriptors on page 206.

Descriptors Enter the required descriptor as defined by the MPEG standard. See A.2 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (MPEG) on page 206.

Table 7-20: PID Remux Session

Parameter Explanation

Page 205: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring CAS Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 202 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

NOTE: To allow communication with the ERM, the NSG 9000 device supports the D6 and R6 NGOD protocols. When communicating using the R6 protocol, NSG is always listening on port 554(RTSP).

7.18 Configuring CAS ParametersThe Conditional Access System (CAS) prevents unauthorized viewing of programs by scrambling services that later on can be decrypted using the correct decrypting key. NSG 9000-40G supports the following CAS systems:

Privacy Mode - An encryption mode developed by Motorola Inc.

DVB CAS - An encryption mode for the DVB protocol.

Table 7-21: NGOD Parameters NSG 9000 -40G

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1.

Streaming Zone Enter the streaming zone as defined in the D6 protocol

NGOD Component Name Enter the component name as defined in the D6 protocol

Bandwidth Update Threshold (kbps)

Define the allowed deviation from the current output bit rate of the device. Whenever the bit rate deviation reaches the value defined in this field, the NSG sends the ERM the updated output bit rate.

Routing Cost Enter a value as defined in the D6 protocol (0-255).

Enable ERM (D6) To enable the NSG 9000-ERM communication, select the Enable ERM (D6) box.

ERM Address Enter the ERM IP address. From NSG9000-40G version 3.2.3 and up, you can also enter the name of the ERM. You can enter up to 100 characters. If you entered the ERM name, NSG9000-40G obtains the IP address of the required ERM from the DNS (Domain Name Server). See 7.3 Configuring Management Port on page 179.

ERM IP Port Enter the ERM TCP port number

ERM Version Select the supported version of the protocol. Version 2 is the default version.

ERM Keep Alive Read only. A period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between the keepalive messages transmitted by the NSG to the ERM. The default is 30 seconds.

Connection Retry Threshold Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between retrials to connect to the ERM to send D6 messages

Hold Time Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between responses to successive Keep Alive and or UPDATE messages received by the NSG. If the duration time elapses and a response is not received, NSG tries to re-establish the connection with the ERM.

Page 206: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring SNMP Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 203 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

To select CAS mode, see 6.17.1 Selecting Encryption Mode on page 170.

To configure DVB CAS, see 6.17.3 Configuring DVB CAS on page 171.

For Privacy Mode general overview, see 4.10.2 Privacy Mode on page 103.

To configure PM parameters, see 7.18.1 Configuring PM Parameters on page 203.

7.18.1 Configuring PM Parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the Privacy Mode tab.

3. Configure the parameters as explained below:

7.19 Configuring SNMP ParametersThe Simple Network Management Protocol allows network management systems to communicate with network elements. By default the SNMP is enabled and you may disable it when required.

Table 7-22: Privacy Mode Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.

Enable PM CAS Select to enable encryption.

Clear To Scramble Transition (sec) Clear To Scramble Transition (sec).

VODS ID The unique ID of the VODS the NSG belongs to.

Warning - ECM Expiration Date (days) The NSG issues a warning if the number of days that have passed since the expiration of the current callback is larger than the value indicated in this field.

Alarm - ECM Expiration Date (days) The NSG issues an alarm if the number of days that have passed since the expiration of the current callback is larger than the value indicated in this field.

ERS Synch Number View only. The current ERS Synch Number. When this number changes, a new ECM is generated.

ECM Next Callback Date The next time the MCT application needs to check whether a new ECM was generated.

Last ECM Update Date The last time the NSG was updated with a new ECM or callback.

Stream Processing on ECM Expiration Select either of the following: Scramble with Last ECM - All NSGs of the

VODS should be updated with the new ECM.

Don’t Scramble - do not scramble the stream.

Page 207: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring SNMP Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 204 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

The SNMP table allows you to create the following:

A list of SNMP managers to receive messages from network elements. Once you have accomplished that, configure the SNMP Community String.

To set password like strings for the various network elements. The default string value for the Get community is public.

By configuring the SNMP Community string you actually set up different SNMP managers to monitor specific groups of devices.

To set SNMP parameters1. In Device Information, select the required device.

2. In Details, select the SNMP tab.

3. Configure the parameters as explained below:

Table 7-23: SNMP Parameters

Parameter Explanation

NSG IP Address The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG.

Enable By default SNMP is enabled. Verify that it is enabled. To disable SNMP, de-select Enable SNMP.

Contact Enter contact information

Location (SysLocation)

Enter the location of the device. In other words, the location of the host on which the SNMP agent, or server runs.

Get Community The name of the community having Read access to the network elements. The elements will respond to this community Get commands. The default string is public.

Host 1 IP Address Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG.

Host 1 Version Open the Version list and select the required SNMP version.

Enable Host 1 Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG.

Host 2 IP Address Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG.

Host 2 Version Open the Version list and select the required SNMP version.

Enable Host 2 Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG.

Host 3 IP Address Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG.

Host 3 Version Open the Version list and select the required SNMP version.

Enable Host 3 Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG.

Host 4 IP Address Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG.

Page 208: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Chapter 7 Configuring NSG 9000-40G Configuring SNMP Parameters

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 205 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

NOTE: You can define up to four hosts.

Host 4 Version Open the Version list and select the required SNMP version.

Enable Host 4 Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG.

Table 7-23: SNMP Parameters

Parameter Explanation

Page 209: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 206 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Appendix AStandard ES Types and Descriptors

A.1 Standard Elementary Stream (ES) TypesThe following standards are used to define types of elementary stream:

A.2 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (MPEG)The following MPEG standards are used to extend the definitions of elementary stream and programs:

Value Description

0x0 ITU-T | ISO/IEC Reserved

0x1 ISO/IEC 11172 Video

0x2 ITU-T Rec. H.262 | ISO/IEC 13818-2 Video or ISO/IEC 11172-2 constrained parameter video stream

0x3 ISO/IEC 11172 Audio

0x4 ISO/IEC 13818-3 Audio

0x5 ITU-T Rec. H.222.0 | ISO/IEC 13818-1 private_sections

0x6 ITU-T Rec. H.222.0 | ISO/IEC 13818-1 PES packets containing private data

0x7 ISO/IEC 13522 MHEG

0x8 ITU-T Rec. H.222.0 | ISO/IEC 13818-1 Annex A DSM CC

0x9 ITU-T Rec. H.222.1

0xA ISO/IEC 13818-6 type A

0xB ISO/IEC 13818-6 type B

0xC ISO/IEC 13818-6 type C

0xD ISO/IEC 13818-6 type D

0xE ISO/IEC 13818-1 auxiliary

0xF-0x7F ITU-T Rec. H.222.0 | ISO/IEC 13818-1 Reserved

0x80 - 0xFF User Private

Value Description

0x2 Video stream descriptor

0x3 audio stream descriptor

0x4 hierarchy descriptor

Page 210: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Appendix A Standard ES Types and Descriptors Standard ES and Program Descriptors (DVB)

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 207 MCT , Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

A.3 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (DVB)The following DVB standards are used to extend the definitions of elementary stream and programs:

0x5 registration descriptor

0x6 data stream alignment descriptor

0x7 target background grid descriptor

0x8 video window descriptor

0x9 CA descriptor

0xA ISO 639 descriptor

0xB system clock descriptor

0xC multiplex buffer utilization descriptor

0xD copyright descriptor

0xF private data indicator descriptor

0x10 smoothing buffer descriptor

0x12 IBP descriptor

Value Description

0x51 Mosaic descriptor

0x52 Stream identifier descriptor

0x56 Teletext descriptor

0x59 Subtitling descriptor

0x5F Private data specifier

0x60 Service move descriptor

0x65 CA system descriptor

0x66 Data broadcast ID descriptor

Value Description

Page 211: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 208 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

Appendix BEIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps

The EIA (Electronic Industries Association) sets internationally recognized standards for standard frequencies (EIA STD) and for Harmonic related carriers (EIA HRC).

Table 7-24: EIA-STD and EIA-HRC

EIA Channel Number STD (Zero Offset) MHz HRC MHz

1 ------- 73.7500

2 57.0000 55.7500

3 63.0000 61.7500

4 69.0000 67.7500

5 79.0000 79.7500

6 85.0000 85.7500

7 177.0000 175.7500

8 183.0000 181.7500

9 189.0000 187.7500

10 195.0000 193.7500

11 201.0000 199.7500

12 207.0000 205.7500

13 213.0000 211.7500

14 123.0000 121.7500

15 129.0000 127.7500

16 135.0000 133.7500

17 141.0000 139.7500

18 147.0000 145.7500

19 153.0000 151.7500

20 159.0000 157.7500

21 165.0000 163.7500

22 171.0000 169.7500

23 219.0000 217.7500

24 225.0000 223.7500

25 231.0000 229.7500

26 237.0000 235.7500

Page 212: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Appendix B EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 209 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

27 243.0000 241.7500

28 249.0000 247.7500

29 255.0000 253.7500

30 261.0000 259.7500

31 267.0000 265.7500

32 273.0000 271.7500

33 279.0000 277.7500

34 285.0000 283.7500

35 291.0000 289.7500

36 297.0000 295.7500

37 303.0000 301.7500

38 309.0000 307.7500

39 315.0000 313.7500

40 321.0000 319.7500

41 327.0000 325.7500

42 333.0000 331.7500

43 339.0000 337.7500

44 345.0000 343.7500

45 351.0000 349.7500

46 357.0000 355.7500

47 363.0000 361.7500

48 369.0000 367.7500

49 375.0000 373.7500

50 381.0000 379.7500

51 387.0000 385.7500

52 393.0000 391.7500

53 399.0000 397.7500

54 405.0000 403.7500

55 411.0000 409.7500

56 417.0000 415.7500

57 423.0000 421.7500

Table 7-24: EIA-STD and EIA-HRC

EIA Channel Number STD (Zero Offset) MHz HRC MHz

Page 213: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Appendix B EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 210 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

58 429.0000 427.7500

59 435.0000 433.7500

60 441.0000 439.7500

61 447.0000 445.7500

62 453.0000 451.7500

63 459.0000 457.7500

64 465.0000 463.7500

65 471.0000 469.7500

66 477.0000 475.7500

67 483.0000 481.7500

68 489.0000 487.7500

69 495.0000 493.7500

70 501.0000 499.7500

71 507.0000 505.7500

72 513.0000 511.7500

73 519.0000 517.7500

74 525.0000 523.7500

75 531.0000 529.7500

76 537.0000 535.7500

77 543.0000 541.7500

78 549.0000 547.7500

79 555.0000 553.7500

80 561.0000 559.7500

81 567.0000 565.7500

82 573.0000 571.7500

83 579.0000 577.7500

84 585.0000 583.7500

85 591.0000 589.7500

86 597.0000 595.7500

87 603.0000 601.7500

88 609.0000 607.7500

Table 7-24: EIA-STD and EIA-HRC

EIA Channel Number STD (Zero Offset) MHz HRC MHz

Page 214: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Appendix B EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 211 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

89 615.0000 613.7500

90 621.0000 619.7500

91 627.0000 625.7500

92 633.0000 631.7500

93 639.0000 637.7500

94 645.0000 643.7500

95 93.0000 91.7500

96 99.0000 97.7500

97 105.0000 103.7500

98 111.0000 109.7500

99 117.0000 115.7500

100 651.0000 649.7500

101 657.0000 655.7500

102 663.0000 661.7500

103 669.0000 667.7500

104 675.0000 673.7500

105 681.0000 679.7500

106 687.0000 685.7500

107 693.0000 691.7500

108 699.0000 697.7500

109 705.0000 703.7500

110 711.0000 709.7500

111 717.0000 715.7500

112 723.0000 721.7500

113 729.0000 727.7500

114 735.0000 733.7500

115 741.0000 739.7500

116 747.0000 745.7500

117 753.0000 751.7500

118 759.0000 757.7500

119 765.0000 763.7500

Table 7-24: EIA-STD and EIA-HRC

EIA Channel Number STD (Zero Offset) MHz HRC MHz

Page 215: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Appendix B EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 212 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

120 771.0000 769.7500

121 777.0000 775.7500

122 783.0000 781.7500

123 789.0000 787.7500

124 795.0000 793.7500

125 801.0000 799.7500

126 807.0000 805.7500

127 813.0000 811.7500

128 819.0000 817.7500

129 825.0000 823.7500

130 831.0000 829.7500

131 837.0000 835.7500

132 843.0000 841.7500

133 849.0000 847.7500

134 855.0000 853.7500

135 861.0000 859.7500

136 867.0000 865.7500

137 873.0000 871.7500

138 879.000 877.7500

139 885.000 883.7500

140 891.000 889.7500

141 897.000 895.7500

142 903.000 901.7500

143 909.000 907.7500

144 915.000 913.7500

145 921.000 919.7500

146 927.000 925.7500

147 933.000 931.7500

148 939.000 937.7500

149 945.000 943.7500

150 951.000 949.7500

Table 7-24: EIA-STD and EIA-HRC

EIA Channel Number STD (Zero Offset) MHz HRC MHz

Page 216: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Appendix B EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps

© 2012 Harmonic Inc. 213 MCT Version 11.2.0.x, Rev B

151 957.000 955.7500

152 963.000 961.7500

153 969.000 967.7500

154 975.000 973.7500

155 981.000 979.7500

156 987.000 985.7500

157 993.000 991.7500

158 999.000 997.7500

Table 7-24: EIA-STD and EIA-HRC

EIA Channel Number STD (Zero Offset) MHz HRC MHz

Page 217: MCT 11 1 - Harmonic Inc · PDF fileHarmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION 11.2.0.X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

Harmonic Inc.549 Baltic WaySunnyvale, CA 94089, U.S.A.T +1 408 542 2500 F +1 408 490 6708

www.harmonicinc.com

© Copyright 2007 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved.Manual Part No. 700-000XXXX